Spectrum Ts Green Book

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 398

ThermoGuard

SPECTRUM TS Multi-Temp
Microprocessor Control
System
TK 51652-1-OD (Rev. 1, 01/03)

Diagnostic Manual
Used on:
SPECTRUM TS Multi-Temperature Truck Units
Controller Software Revision 2500
HMI Software Revision 6500

Copyright© 2002 Thermo King Corp., Minneapolis, MN, USA


Printed in USA
Revision History
Original June, 2002
1st Rev. TK 51652-1-OD (Rev. 1, 01/03) Various revisions.

This manual is published for informational purposes only and the information so provided should
not be considered as all-inclusive or covering all contingencies. If further information is required,
Thermo King Corporation should be consulted.

Sale of product shown in this manual is subject to Thermo King’s terms and conditions
including, but not limited to, the Thermo King Limited Express Warranty. Such terms and
conditions are available upon request. Thermo King’s warranty will not apply to any
equipment which has been “so repaired or altered outside the manufacturer’s plants as,
in the manufacturer’s judgment, to effect its stability.”

No warranties, express or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular


purpose or merchantability, or warranties arising from course of dealing or usage of
trade, are made regarding the information, recommendations, and descriptions
contained herein. Manufacturer is not responsible and will not be held liable in contract
or in tort (including negligence) for any special, indirect or consequential damages,
including injury or damage caused to vehicles, contents or persons, by reason of the
installation of any Thermo King product or its mechanical failure.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Since not everyone is familiar with Section 7 - Service Information
microprocessor based control systems, please take
This section offers Service Information on the
a few minutes to read this page. It explains the
basic component parts of the Truck SPECTRUM
content and structure of this manual. This will
microprocessor control system.
make it easier for you to find the information you
need.
Section 8 - Refrigeration System
Information
Section 1 - Safety information
This section offers Refrigeration System
This section contains the safety information for
Information and Refrigeration Service Procedures
the Truck SPECTRUM Microprocessor Control
for units equipped with Truck SPECTRUM
Systems. Read this material carefully before
microprocessor control systems.
working on the unit.

Section 2 - Hardware Description Section 9 - Diagrams and


Schematics
This section includes the Truck SPECTRUM
This section includes the Truck SPECTRUM
microprocessor control system hardware
microprocessor control system electrical
description. It also contains identification of
schematics and unit wiring diagrams.
relays, LEDs, component layout and connector
maps.

Section 3 - Software Description


This section discusses the operation of the Truck
SPECTRUM microprocessor control system
software and programmable features. Each menu
and feature is discussed individually to illustrate
how each works and how to change the
programmable settings.

Section 4 - Operation
This section explains how to operate the Truck
SPECTRUM microprocessor control system. This
information is referenced by material in the
Diagnosis section.

Section 5 - Diagnosis
This section explains how to diagnosis units
equipped with Truck SPECTRUM
microprocessor control systems. It includes both
Alarm Code Diagnostics and Other Symptom
Diagnostics. This section will reference material
in Section 4 and 6.

Section 6 - Service Procedures


This section includes Service Procedures to assist
the technician when servicing units equipped with
Truck SPECTRUM microprocessor control
systems. These procedures are referenced by
material in the Diagnosis section.
Section 1 — SPECTRUM Safety Information

General Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1


Auto Start/Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
First Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Refrigeration Oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
First Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Electrical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Microprocessor Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Electrical Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
First aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Low Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Truck SPECTRUM Control System Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Safety Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Section 1 — SPECTRUM Safety Information
General Practices Auto Start/Stop
1. Always wear goggles or safety glasses. CAUTION: The unit may start
Refrigerant and battery acid can permanently automatically and at any time when the
damage the eyes. unit is turned “on”. Units start
2. Never close the compressor discharge service automatically in both CYCLE-SENTRY
valve with the unit running. Never operate the mode and Continuous mode. Be sure to
unit with the discharge service valve closed. turn the unit “off” before opening doors,
inspecting or working on any part of the
3. Keep hands, clothing and tools clear of fans unit.
and belts when the unit is running.
4. Be sure gauge manifold hoses are in good Refrigerant
condition. Never let them come in contact
At Thermo King we recognize the need to
with belts, fans, pulleys or hot surfaces.
preserve the environment and limit the potential
5. Never apply heat to a sealed refrigeration harm to the ozone layer that can result from
system or container. allowing refrigerant to escape into the
atmosphere.
6. Refrigerants in the presence of an open flame
produce toxic gases. These gases are severe We strictly adhere to a policy that promotes the
respiratory irritants capable of causing death. recovery and limits the loss of refrigerant into
the atmosphere.
7. Be sure all mounting bolts are the correct
length for the application and are securely When working on transport refrigeration
tightened. systems, a recovery process that prevents or
minimizes refrigerant loss to the atmosphere is
8. Use extreme caution when drilling holes in the
required by law. In addition, service personnel
unit. Holes may weaken structural
must be aware of Federal, State and local
components. Holes drilled in wiring can cause
regulations governing the use of refrigerants
fire or explosion. Holes drilled into the
and certification of technicians.
refrigeration system will release refrigerant.
When refrigerants are exposed to the atmosphere
9. Use caution when working around exposed
in liquid form, they evaporate rapidly, freezing
coil fins. The fins can cause painful
anything they contact. If they contact the skin
lacerations.
severe frostbite can result. In the event of
10. Use caution when working with refrigerant in frostbite, the objectives of first aid are to protect
a closed or confined area with a limited air the frozen area from additional injury and to warm
supply such as a trailer, container or hold of a it rapidly.
ship. Refrigerant tends to displace air and can
cause oxygen depletion. This may result in First Aid
unconsciousness or death due to suffocation.
1. Warm the frozen area by immersing it in
luke-warm (not hot) water or by covering the
area with warm blankets.
2. Obtain medical assistance as soon as possible.
3. If refrigerant contacts the eyes, flush them
with water immediately and obtain medical
assistance as soon as possible.

17 January 2003 1-1


Section 1 — SPECTRUM Safety Information

Refrigeration Oil 2. Use tools with insulated handles that are in


good condition. Never hold metal tools in
Avoid contact with the eyes. Avoid prolonged your hand if exposed high voltage conductors
contact with the skin or clothing. To prevent skin are within reach.
irritation wash hands thoroughly after handling
refrigeration oil. 3. Treat all wires as high voltage wires.
4. Never work alone on high voltage circuits.
First Aid Another person should be nearby in case of
In case of eye contact, flush immediately with accident.
water for at least 15 minutes. Obtain medical
assistance as soon as possible. First aid
Immediate action must be taken after a person has
Electrical received an electrical shock. Medical attention
should be summoned as soon as possible.
Microprocessor Service The source of electricity must be immediately
Precautions must be taken to prevent electrostatic removed, either by shutting down the power or
discharge when servicing the microprocessor and removing the victim from the source. If the victim
related components. A potential difference less must be removed from a live circuit, pull the
than that required to create a small spark between victim off with a non-conductive material. Use the
a finger and a doorknob can cause severe damage victim’s clothing, a rope, wood or your belt. After
to solid state components. Refer to the material in separating the victim from the power source,
this manual and the Electrostatic Discharge immediately check for pulse and respiration. If a
Training Guide (TK 40282) for additional pulse is not present, start CPR (Cardio-Pulmonary
information. Resuscitation) immediately. If a pulse is present,
respiration may be restored by mouth to mouth
Welding resuscitation. Obtain emergency medical
assistance as soon as possible.
Precautions must be taken before welding on the
unit. Refer to the Service Procedures in this
manual for additional information. Low Voltage
Control circuits are 12 volts dc. This voltage
Electrical Hazards potential is not considered dangerous, but the
large amount of current available can cause severe
High Voltage burns if shorted to ground.

Units with optional Electric Standby utilize 460, Do not wear jewelry, watches or rings when
380 or 230 volt, 3 phase or 230 volt single phase working on the unit. If these items contact an
AC power any time the unit is operating in electrical circuit severe burns may result.
Electric mode. This voltage potential is also
present any time the unit is connected to standby
power. Extreme care must be used when working
on the unit, as these voltages are capable of
causing serious injury or death.
1. When working on high voltage circuits, do not
make any rapid movements. Unplanned
movements can cause contact with high
voltage.

1-2 17 January 2003


Section 1 — SPECTRUM Safety Information

Truck SPECTRUM Control


System Notes
NOTE: The following procedures must be
followed when working on units equipped with
SPECTRUM control systems.
• Never use testers consisting of a battery and a
light bulb to test circuits on any
microprocessor based equipment.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the
battery, the unit must be turned “off”.
• Any time a Return Air or Discharge Air sensor
is changed, it must be calibrated as shown in
Service Procedure A15A.
• Any time the SPECTRUM Microprocessor is
replaced, these Service Procedures must be
used:
A02A Recording Existing Microprocessor
Setup
A03A Microprocessor Removal and
Replacement
A04A Microprocessor Setup
• Any time the SPECTRUM Interface Board is
replaced, Service Procedure A03A must be
followed.
• Any time welding is to be done on the unit or
vehicle Service Procedure A26A must be
followed.

17 January 2003 1-3


Section 1 — SPECTRUM Safety Information

Safety Decals

1-4 17 January 2003


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware
Description
Truck SPECTRUM Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
General Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
SPECTRUM Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Microprocessor Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Unit Power Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
HMI Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Microprocessor Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
SPECTRUM Microprocessor Connector Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
J1 - Microprocessor/Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
J2 - Microprocessor/Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
J3 - Microprocessor Sensor - by use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Interface Board Fuse Size & Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Interface Board LED Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Interface Board Relay Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Interface Board Jumpers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Jumper Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Interface Board Connector Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
P1 - Microprocessor/Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
P2 - Microprocessor/Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
P14 - Interface Board - by use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
P16 - Electric Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
P18 - Zone 1 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
P9 - Remote Light Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
P20 - Power Switch Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
P21 - Engine Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
P24 - HMI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
P22 - DAS Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
P17 - Communications Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
P3 - Interface Board and P200 - Multi-Temp Option Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Power Supply Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Multi-Temp Option Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Multi-Temp Option Board Fuse Size & Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Multi-Temp Option Board LED Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Multi-Temp Option Board Relay Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Multi-Temp Option Board Connector Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
P3 - Interface Board and P200 - Multi-Temp Option Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
P201 - Zone 2 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
P202 - Zone 3 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Graded and Ungraded Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Refrigeration System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Engine Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Optional Electric Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Standard Model 50 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
High Voltage Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Phase Detect Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware
Description
Truck SPECTRUM Block Diagram

17 January 2003 2-1


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

General Description Unit Configuration


The SPECTRUM microprocessor controller is a The base of the control system is the
self contained temperature control unit designed microprocessor. The interface board is mounted
for truck applications. Model 30 units are on the microprocessor and is connected to it by
powered by a diesel engine and Model 50 units means of J1 and J2. The system power supply
are powered by either the diesel engine or an board is located on the corner of the interface
external electric standby power source turning an board. The multi-temp option board is mounted
induction motor. The unit mounts on the upper over the interface board. The unit is controlled by
front of the truck box and is connected to one or means of the HMI Control Panel.
more remote evaporators located inside the truck
box. The compressor, condenser fan and Microprocessor Power Switch
alternator are belt driven. Defrost is by means of
hot gas. The microprocessor power switch applies 12 volts
DC control power to the HMI Control Panel. The
CAUTION: Dangerous single phase or switch is located just ahead of the control box on
three phase AC power is present the compressor side of the unit. Main power to the
whenever the unit is operating in Electric controls is supplied by 60 amp and 40 amp fuses.
mode and whenever the unit is connected Note that when the Microprocessor Power Switch
to external standby power. Voltages of this is turned off that power is still applied to the HMI
magnitude can be lethal. Exercise Control Panel and the unit control circuits. To
extreme caution when working on the completely remove power from the control
unit. system, disconnect the unit battery.

SPECTRUM Control System


The SPECTRUM Microprocessor Control System
consists of the following main components:
• Microprocessor Power Switch
• HMI Control Panel
Microprocessor Power Switch
• SPECTRUM Microprocessor
• Interface Board
• Multi-Temp Option Board
• Sensors
• Refrigeration System Controls
• Engine Controls
• High Voltage Tray (Model 50 Units)

2-2 17 January 2003


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

Unit Power Fuses Microprocessor


Over-current protection is provided by fuses. A 60 The SPECTRUM microprocessor is located on
amp main power fuse is located in the “2” circuit the rear panel of the control enclosure. Two
near the unit battery. The remote evaporator fan multi-pin interface board connectors (J1 and J2)
motors are protected by 30 amp in-line fuses are located on the front of the microprocessor. A
located inside the control box on the remote 37 pin sensor connector (J3) is located at the
evaporator harness. lower left of the microprocessor.

HMI Control Panel


The HMI (Human Machine Interface) Control
Panel consists of the display and eight touch
sensitive keys. The four keys on the sides of the
control panel are used to turn the unit on and off,
initiate a manual defrost cycle, and select high
speed lockout operation. The function of the four
keys located under the display screen change as
required by the current menu shown on the
display screen.

SPECTRUM Microprocessor
HMI Control Panel
Microprocessor Operation
The display screen is used by the microprocessor
to provide visual prompt and display information The microprocessor is the heart of the control
to the operator, such as operating mode, setpoints, system. It consists of the actual microprocessor,
gauge and hourmeter readings and operating software, memory, inputs and outputs. The
conditions of the diesel engine. All information is microprocessor works together with the software
shown in English, with the ability to display in loaded into it to provide the required operating
several other languages. and control functions.
See Section 4 for complete operating details. Inputs are used to supply power and system
information to the microprocessor. Outputs are
used by the microprocessor to control the
operation of the unit components.
The microprocessor has no user serviceable
components.

17 January 2003 2-3


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

SPECTRUM Microprocessor Connector Maps


J1 - Microprocessor/Interface Board
hard wired

J2 - Microprocessor/Interface Board
hard wired

J3 - Microprocessor Sensor - by use

Pin Wire
Number Number Description

1 RTP1-01 Return Air - Zone 1 - Pos (Blue Sensor Wire)

2 RTN1-01 Return Air - Zone 1 - Neg (Brown Sensor Wire)

24 DTP1-01 Discharge Air – Zone 1 - Pos (Blue Sensor Wire)

13 DTN1-01 Discharge Air – Zone 1 - Neg (Brown Sensor Wire)

25 CTP1-01 Coil Temp - Zone 1 - Pos (Blue Sensor Wire)

14 CTN1-01 Coil Temp - Zone 1 - Neg (Brown Sensor Wire)

3 ATP-01 Ambient Temp - Pos (Blue Sensor Wire)

4 ATN-01 Ambient Temp - Neg (Brown Sensor Wire)

26 WTP-01 Water Temp - Pos (Blue Sensor Wire)

15 WTN-01 Water Temp - Neg (Brown Sensor Wire)

21 DPP-01 Discharge Pressure - Power – (Red Wire)

32 DPN-01 Discharge Pressure – Ground – (Black Wire)

9 DP-01 Discharge Pressure – Signal – (White Wire)

22 SPP-01 Suction Pressure – Power – (Red Wire)

33 SPN-01 Suction Pressure – Ground – (Black Wire)

10 SP-01 Suction Pressure – Signal – (White Wire)

23 CLSP-01 Coolant Level Sensor Power (Red Wire)

34 Not Used

11 Not Used Oil Pressure – Signal (Not used – Oil Pressure Switch)

5 RTP2-01 Return Air - Zone 2 - Pos (Blue Sensor Wire)

6 RTN2-01 Return Air - Zone 2 - Neg (Brown Sensor Wire)

19 CTP2-01 Coil Temp - Zone 2 - Pos (Blue Sensor Wire)

30 CTN2-01 Coil Temp - Zone 2 - Neg (Brown Sensor Wire)

18 Not Used Return Air - Zone 3 - Pos (Blue Sensor Wire)

2-4 17 January 2003


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

J3 - Microprocessor Sensor - by use (continued)

Pin Wire
Number Number Description

29 Not Used Return Air - Zone 3 - Neg (Brown Sensor Wire)

7 Not Used Coil Temp - Zone 3 - Pos (Blue Sensor Wire)

8 Not Used Coil Temp - Zone 3 - Neg (Brown Sensor Wire)

27 Not Used Spare Temp Sensor - Pos (Blue Sensor Wire)

16 Not Used Spare Temp Sensor - Neg (Brown Sensor Wire)

35 CPTP-01 Compressor Temperature - Pos (Blue Sensor Wire)

12 CPTN-01 Compressor Temperature - Neg (Brown Sensor Wire)

17 DTP2-01 Discharge Air - Zone 2 - Pos (Blue Sensor Wire)

28 DTN2-01 Discharge Air - Zone 2 - Neg (Brown Sensor Wire)

20 Not Used Discharge Air - Zone 3 - Pos (Blue Sensor Wire)

31 Not Used Discharge Air - Zone 3 - Neg (Brown Sensor Wire)

17 January 2003 2-5


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

Interface Board The interface board is plugged into the


microprocessor and secured with mounting
The Interface Board acts as the interface between hardware. The main components on the interface
the microprocessor and the unit components such board are the control relays, fuses, LEDs (to
as motor contactors, solenoids and valves. It also indicate relay or output states) CYCLE-SENTRY
provides fuse protection for the controls and buzzer, jumpers and the wire harness connectors.
components. The interface board directly supports Zone 1.
The microprocessor controls the operation of the Zone 2 is supported by a multi-temp option board.
unit through the control relays on the interface The only user serviceable components on the
board. Each relay is individually fuse protected. interface board are the fuses and jumpers.
An LED next to each relay is illuminated when
the relay is energized by the microprocessor and
Interface Board Fuse Size &
has transferred its contacts to the energized state.
Function

Fuse Size Function

F2 40A Starter, Fuel Pull-In

F4 1A Remote Status Light (Option)

F5 5A Install for Control System


Functional Test

F6 40A Preheat

F7 15A 2A Power Zone 1

F8 2A Alternator Excitation

F9 2A DAS 2A Power (Option)

F10 2A Remote 2A Power (Option)

F11 7.5A Run Relay

F14 2A Not Used

F15 2A HMI 2A Power

F16 7.5A 8 Power to HMI, DAS

F17 2A Purge Valve

F18 15A High Speed Solenoid

F19 2A Not Used


SPECTRUM Interface Board
F20 2A Hot Gas Bypass

F21 2A Condenser Inlet Solenoid

F22 2A Liquid Injection Valve

F23 2A Power Supply

F27 2A Not Used

F28 5A Not Used

F29 1A Zone 1 Door Switch 2A Power

F31 2A Not Used

2-6 17 January 2003


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

Interface Board LED Functions Interface Board Jumpers


Three sets of jumper pins are located on the
LED Function
Interface Board. Each set consists of a shorting
1 Alternator Excitation Circuit connector and three pins. For normal operation,
2 High Speed Circuit the shorting connectors must be installed as
shown for each set of jumpers. To change the
3 Zone 1 Hot Gas Circuit setting remove the shorting connector and place it
4 Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Circuit over either the center pin and right pin or the
center pin and left pin.
5 Zone 1 Suction Line Solenoid Circuit

6 Diesel/Electric Circuit Jumper Functions


7 Run Circuit Jumper Function
8 Preheat Circuit X2 Cold Start Jumper
9 Liquid Injection Circuit X5 Electric Standby Jumper
10 Not Used X7 Rear Remote Jumper
11 Zone 1 Fan or Defrost Circuit

12 Condenser Inlet Solenoid

13 Not used

14 Hot Gas Bypass Valve

15 Purge Valve

These LEDs are illuminated when the associated


circuit is energized.

Interface Board Relay Functions


Relay Function Jumper Setup – Model 30 Units

K1 Alternator Excitation Relay For normal operation on Model 30 units that do


not include the electric standby option, the
K2 Zone 1 Fan Relay
jumpers should be set as shown here. Jumpers X2,
K3 Starter Relay X5 and X7 should all be set to the right.
K4 Fuel Solenoid Pull In Relay

K5 Throttle Solenoid Relay

K6 On/Off Relay

K7 Run Relay

K8 Zone 1 Hot Gas Solenoid Relay

K9 Preheat Relay

K10 Diesel/Electric Relay

K13 Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Relay

K14 Zone 1 Suction Line Solenoid Relay

17 January 2003 2-7


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

Jumper Setup – Model 50 Units

For normal operation on Model 50 units that


include the electric standby option, the jumpers
should be set as shown here. Jumpers X2 and X7
should all be set to the right and jumper X5 should
be set to the left.

2-8 17 January 2003


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

Interface Board Connector Maps


P1 - Microprocessor/Interface Board
hard wired

P2 - Microprocessor/Interface Board
hard wired

P14 - Interface Board - by use


Pin Wire
Number Number Description

14 Not Used HPCI (N/O, other side to CH)

18 8H-01 HPCO

23 HPCO-01 HPCO

20 HGBP-01 HGB +

34 HGBN-01 HGB -

35 LIQP-01 PWMP + (LIQ INJ)

36 LIQN-01 PWMN - (LIQ INJ)

3 PVP-01 PV +

4 PVN-01 PV -

2 Not used

10 Not used

8 CISP-01 CIS +

1 CISN-01 CIS -

5 Not Used SLP

31 Not Used PT

24 EXC-01 EXC

13 W-01 W ALT

11 Not Used 2A

16 20B-01 20B

28 CLS-01 CLS (Signal)

12 OLSP-01 OLSP (Oil Level Switch - Positive)

29 OLSN-01 OLSC (Oil Level Switch - Signal)

15 Not Used FPR

25 RPMP-01 RPM +

26 RPMN-01 RPM -

17 Not Used D114 (Electric Clutch)

9 Not Used D115/D111 (Spare)

17 January 2003 2-9


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

P14 - Interface Board - by use (continued)


Pin Wire
Number Number Description

27 Not Used SP IN

22 Not Used SP OUT1

21 Not Used SP OUT2

30 Not Used PWMP (GOV +)

33 Not Used PWMN (GOV -)

6 Not Used ETV A

19 Not Used ETV B

7 Not Used ETV C

32 Not Used ETV D

P16 - Electric Connector


Pin Wire
Number Number Description

1 7EH-01 7E to Phase Detect Module

2 EOL-01 From Overload Relay

3 8F-01 8F to Phase Detect Module

4 CHP-01 Chassis Ground

5 ER-01 ER from Phase Detect Module

6 Not Used 26E

P18 - Zone 1 Connector


Pin Wire
Number Number Description

1 SLS1-01 Zone 1 Suction Line Solenoid

2 HGS1-01 Zone 1 Hot Gas Solenoid

3 FS1-01 Zone 1 Fan speed signal

4 LLS1-01 Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid

5 2AAL-01 Zone 1 2AAL Power (Door Switch)

6 DS1-01 Zone 1 Door Switch (Signal)

7 Not Used

8 LLS1-02 Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid

2-10 17 January 2003


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

P9 - Remote Light Connector


Pin Wire
Number Number Description

1 Not Used RL (Blk) RL-01

2 Not Used F4 (Red) 8FC-01

3 Not Used ALM (Wht) ALM-01

4 Not Used Not Used

P20 - Power Switch Connector


Pin Wire
Number Number Description

1 2A-01 2A Power

8 8-01 8 Power

P21 - Engine Connector


Pin Wire
Number Number Description

1 Not Used 29 to Defrost Damper

2 Not Used 29A to Defrost Damper Sense

3 8S-01 8S to Starter Solenoid

4 H-01 PH to Glow Plugs

5 7D-01 7D to Throttle Solenoid

6 8DP-01 8DP to Fuel Solenoid Pull In Coil

7 8D-01 8D to Fuel Solenoid Hold Coil

8 FP-01 FP Power to Fuel Pump

17 January 2003 2-11


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

P24 - HMI Connector


Pin Wire
Number Number Description

1 CANL-01 To HMI Control Panel

2 CANH-01 To HMI Control Panel

3 SHLD-01 To HMI Control Panel

4 ON-01 To HMI Control Panel

5 2A-04 To HMI Control Panel

6 8FP-01 To HMI Control Panel

7 Not Used To HMI Control Panel

8 CHP-04 Chassis ground to HMI Control Panel

P22 - DAS Connector


Pin Wire
Number Number Description

1 Not Used

2 Not Used

3 Not Used

4 Not Used

5 2A-06 Power to DAS

6 2L-01 Power to DAS

7 2P-01 Power to Printer Port

8 CHP-06 Chassis ground to DAS

P17 - Communications Connector


Pin Wire
Number Number Description

1 CCOM-05 Chassis ground

2 CCOM-04 Chassis ground

3 DPD1-01 Jumper to P17 Pin 4

4 DPD1-01 Jumper from P17 Pin 3

5 CCOM-07 DPD to chassis ground

2-12 17 January 2003


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

P17 - Communications Connector (continued)


Pin Wire
Number Number Description

6 Not Used

7 TXD1-01 Transmit COM 1

8 RXD2-01 Receive COM 2

9 Not Used

10 RXD1-01 Receive COM 1

11 TXD2-01 Transmit COM 2

12 Not Used

P3 - Interface Board and P200 - Multi-Temp Option Board Connectors


Pin Wire
Number Number Description

1 FS3-01 Zone 3 Fan Speed Signal

2 HGS3-01 Zone 3 Hot Gas Solenoid

3 SLS3-01 Zone 3 Suction Line Solenoid

4 FM3-01 Zone 3 Fan Motor

5 CHP-03 Chassis Ground

6 LLS2-01 Zone 2 Liquid Line Solenoid

7 FS2-02 Zone 2 Fan Speed Signal

8 DS3-01 Zone 3 Door Switch

9 LLS3-01 Zone 3 Liquid Line Solenoid

10 8-02 8 Circuit Power

11 FM2-01 Zone 2 Fan Motor

12 SLS2-01 Zone 2 Suction Line Solenoid

13 HGS2-01 Zone 2 Hot Gas Solenoid

14 DS2-01 Zone 2 Door Switch

15 Not Used

16 Not Used

17 January 2003 2-13


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

Power Supply Board


The power supply board provides regulated DC
power to the microprocessor and interface board.
It is separate from the other boards due to
manufacturing considerations and to allow the
capability to be increased as required for future
applications.
If the LED on the power supply board is glowing
the power supply board is functioning normally.

SPECTRUM Power Supply Board

The power supply board has no user serviceable


components.

2-14 17 January 2003


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

Multi-Temp Option Board Multi-Temp Option Board LED


Functions
The Multi-Temp Option Board adds the control
functions for Zone 2 and Zone 3. The LED Function
microprocessor controls the operation of the
additional zones through the control relays on the 1 Zone 2 Suction Line Solenoid Circuit
multi-temp option board. An LED is illuminated
2 Zone 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Circuit
when a relay is energized by the microprocessor
and has transferred its contacts to the energized 3 Zone 2 Hot Gas Circuit
state.
4 Zone 2 Fan or Defrost Circuit

5 Zone 3 Suction Line Solenoid Circuit

6 Zone 3 Liquid Line Solenoid Circuit

7 Zone 3 Hot Gas Circuit

8 Zone 3 Fan or Defrost Circuit

These LEDs are illuminated when the associated


SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Option Board circuit is energized.
The only user serviceable components on the
interface board are the fuses and jumpers. Multi-Temp Option Board Relay
Functions
Multi-Temp Option Board Fuse Size
& Function Relay Function

K200 Zone 2 Fan Relay


Fuse Size Function
K202 Zone 2 Hot Gas Solenoid Relay
F200 15A 2A Power Zone 2
K203 Zone 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Relay
F201 1A Zone 2,3 Door Switch 2A Power
K204 Zone 2 Suction Line Solenoid Relay
F202 15A 2A Power Zone 3

17 January 2003 2-15


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

Multi-Temp Option Board Connector Maps


P3 - Interface Board and P200 - Multi-Temp Option Board Connectors
Pin Wire
Number Number Description

1 FS3-01 Zone 3 Fan Speed Signal

2 HGS3-01 Zone 3 Hot Gas Solenoid

3 SLS3-01 Zone 3 Suction Line Solenoid

4 FM3-01 Zone 3 Fan Motor

5 CHP-03 Chassis Ground

6 LLS2-01 Zone 2 Liquid Line Solenoid

7 FS2-02 Zone 2 Fan Speed Signal

8 DS3-01 Zone 3 Door Switch

9 LLS3-01 Zone 3 Liquid Line Solenoid

10 8-02 8 Circuit Power

11 FM2-01 Zone 2 Fan Motor

12 SLS2-01 Zone 2 Suction Line Solenoid

13 HGS2-01 Zone 2 Hot Gas Solenoid

14 DS2-01 Zone 2 Door Switch

15 Not Used

16 Not Used

P201 - Zone 2 Connector


Pin Wire
Number Number Description

1 SLS2-01 Zone 2 Suction Line Solenoid

2 HGS2-01 Zone 2 Hot Gas Solenoid

3 FS2-01 Zone 2 Fan speed signal

4 LLS2-01 Zone 2 Liquid Line Solenoid

5 2AAL-02 Zone 2 2AAL Power (Zone 2 Door Switch)

6 DS2-01 Zone 2 Door Switch (Zone 2 Signal)

7 Not Used

8 LLS2-02 Zone 2 Liquid Line Solenoid

2-16 17 January 2003


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

P202 - Zone 3 Connector


Pin Wire
Number Number Description

1 SLS3-01 Zone 3 Suction Line Solenoid

2 HGS3-01 Zone 3 Hot Gas Solenoid

3 FS3-01 Zone 3 Fan speed signal

4 LLS3-01 Zone 3 Liquid Line Solenoid

5 2AAL-03 Zone 3 2AAL Power (Zone 3 Door Switch)

6 DS3-01 Zone 3 Door Switch (Zone 3 Signal)

7 Not Used

8 LLS3-02 Zone 3 Liquid Line Solenoid

17 January 2003 2-17


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

Complete SPECTRUM Control System with Multi-Temp Option Board Installed

2-18 17 January 2003


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

Sensors Discharge Air Sensor: This sensor monitors the


temperature of the air leaving the evaporator coil.
The sensors monitor temperatures at various The sensor is located in the remote evaporator
points in the system as well as oil pressure, oil and discharge air path and is connected directly to the
coolant levels and engine speed. microprocessor. The unit will control on this
sensor if the return air sensor fails or if discharge
Graded and Ungraded Sensors air sensor control is selected. This is a graded
The Return Air and Discharge Air sensors are sensor and must be replaced with a graded sensor.
graded sensors. This feature allows accuracy The microprocessor must be calibrated to the
without the need for ice water calibration. The sensor grade of the sensor installed in the
sensor grade (from 1L through 9H) is stamped on discharge air position in order to operate properly.
the sensor and must be entered into the It is connected to the microprocessor via the DTP
microprocessor when a sensor is changed in order and DTN wires.
to properly calibrate temperature readings. Coil Temperature Sensor: This sensor monitors
An ungraded sensor is used to measure the the temperature of the evaporator coil. The sensor
evaporator coil temperature and ambient is located on the remote evaporator coil header
temperature since these temperatures are not as plate and is connected directly to the
critical as Return and Discharge air temperatures. microprocessor. This is not a graded sensor. It is
connected to the microprocessor via the CTP and
Return Air Sensor: This sensor monitors the CTN wires.
temperature of the air returning to the remote
Ambient Temperature Sensor: This sensor
evaporator coil. The sensor is located in the return
air flow and is connected directly to the monitors the ambient air temperature. The sensor
microprocessor. The unit controls on this sensor is located in the main unit and is connected
under normal conditions. This is a graded sensor directly to the microprocessor. This is not a
and must be replaced with a graded sensor. The graded sensor. It is connected to the
microprocessor must be calibrated to the sensor microprocessor via the ATP and ATN wires.
grade of the sensor installed in the return air
position in order to operate properly. It is
connected to the microprocessor via the RTP and
RTN wires.

17 January 2003 2-19


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

Refrigeration System High Pressure Cutout: The high pressure cutout is


located at the compressor head of two cylinder
Components compressors, on the discharge manifold of four
The refrigeration system controls are used to cylinder compressors and on the discharge line of
control the operation of the refrigeration system as scroll compressors. This switch monitors the
required by the microprocessor. The discharge pressure at the compressor. The switch
microprocessor determines these requirements by is closed with normal pressures and open with
considering the setpoint, the software, the setting excessive pressures. The switch will open and
of programmable features and the information close at pressures determined by the refrigerant
supplied by the sensors. For additional used in the unit. It opens on high discharge
information see Section 8 of this manual. pressure to shut the unit down to prevent damage.
These three valves are located in the condenser Discharge Pressure Transducer: This transducer
section of the unit. They are common to all zones. supplies the discharge pressure at the compressor
Condenser Inlet Solenoid: This valve controls the to the microprocessor. This information is used by
flow of refrigerant to the condenser. This solenoid the microprocessor and software to determine the
is energized (closed) when any compartment is unit operating conditions.
operating in heat or defrost mode. This is a Suction Pressure Transducer: This transducer
normally open valve. supplies the suction pressure at the compressor to
Receiver Tank Check Valve: This valve relieves
the microprocessor. This information is used by
excessive pressure in the receiver tank when the the microprocessor and software to determine the
unit is turned off. unit operating conditions. It should be noted that
the suction pressure transducer is located
Purge Valve: The purge valve is energized (open) downstream of the throttling valve. As a result,
during heat and defrost mode. This is a normally the suction pressure displayed is compressor
closed valve. suction pressure.
The following components are also located in the Compressor Temperature Sensor: This transducer
main unit. supplies the compressor temperature to the
microprocessor. This information is used by the
microprocessor and software to determine the unit
operating conditions.

2-20 17 January 2003


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

The following valves are required for each zone.


They are located in the remote evaporator(s) for
each zone.
Liquid Line Solenoid: This valve is energized
(open) any time cooling, heating or defrosting is
required in its zone. The valve is de-energized
when the zone is in null to stop refrigerant flow in
that zone. This is normally closed valve.
Hot Gas Solenoid: This valve is energized (open)
any time heating or defrosting is required in the
zone. This is a normally closed valve.
Suction Line Solenoid: If a zone is capable of
reverse cycle operation it is said to be invertible.
Reverse cycle means that the evaporator coil in
that zone is used as the condenser coil during heat
operation as long as at least one other zone is
operating in cool mode.
The suction line solenoid is energized (closed)
when its compartment is operating in heat mode
as long as at least one other zone is operating in
cool mode. This is a normally open valve.

17 January 2003 2-21


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

Engine Controls Flywheel Sensor: This sensor monitors the RPM


of the diesel engine. The flywheel sensor is
The engine controls are used to control the located just under the door side engine mount. It
operation of the diesel engine (or electric motor) supplies engine speed information to the
as required by the microprocessor. The microprocessor via the RPMP and RPMN wires.
microprocessor determines these requirements by
Glow Plugs: The glow plugs are energized by the
considering the setpoint, the software, the setting
of programmable features and the information microprocessor via the H wire to preheat the
supplied by the sensors. engine.
Starter: The starter is located on the compressor
Coolant Temperature Sensor: This sensor
monitors the temperature of the coolant in the side of the engine. It is energized by the
diesel engine. It is located on the diesel engine microprocessor via the 8S wire to crank the
thermostat housing and is connected to the engine.
microprocessor via the WTP and WTN wires. Fuel Solenoid: The fuel solenoid is located at the
Coolant Level Sensor: This sensor monitors the rear of the injector pump and is used to start and
level of coolant in the radiator used by the diesel stop the flow of fuel to the diesel engine. It is
engine. It is located on the radiator expansion energized to start fuel flow by the microprocessor
tank. If the coolant level falls below the sensor for via the 8D wire. The fuel solenoid features two
a specified period of time a low coolant condition coils, a pull-in coil and a hold coil. The pull-in
is assumed to exist. It is connected to the coil draws approximately 40 amperes and the hold
microprocessor via the CLS wire. coil draws approximately 1 ampere. The pull-in
coil is momentarily energized by the fuel solenoid
Oil Pressure Switch: The oil pressure switch timer for a few seconds to shift the fuel linkage.
monitors the oil pressure of the diesel engine. It is
Throttle Solenoid: The high speed (throttle)
located on the engine side of the unit frame. It is
connected to the microprocessor via the 20B and solenoid is located just below the fuel injection
CHO- wires. pump. It is energized by the microprocessor via
the 7D wire to initiate high speed operation.
Oil Level Sensor: The oil level sensor monitors the
oil level in the diesel engine. It is located above
the oil pan on the door side of the engine. It
supplies information on the oil level to the
microprocessor via the OLS wire. The switch is
closed with low oil level.

2-22 17 January 2003


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

Optional Electric Standby High Voltage Tray


(Model 50 units only) The high voltage tray contains the contactors,
The Electric Standby option allows the unit to be overload relay and phase detect module used to
operated on either the diesel engine or external operate the drive motor on units equipped with
electric power. The units are supplied to operate Electric Standby. The contactors are controlled by
on three phase power. +12 volt dc control signals from the Interface
Board. The high voltage tray is located inside the
CAUTION: High voltage AC power is control box just to the rear of the Microprocessor/
present whenever the unit is operating in Interface Board Assembly.
Electric mode and whenever the unit is
connected to external standby power. Phase Detect Module
Voltages of this magnitude can be lethal.
The phase detect module is designed to monitor
Exercise extreme caution when working
both single and 3 phase voltages from 160 volts
on the unit.
AC through 510 volts AC. The phase detect
module will detect missing phases, phase rotation
Standard Model 50 Features and low voltage on three phase or single phase
The following features are standard equipment on power. For operation and diagnostics see
units equipped with Electric Standby. Section 5.
Automatic Diesel/Electric Selection: The unit will
automatically switch to electric operation when a
power cord is connected and the standby power is
switched “on”. The unit can also be programmed
to automatically switch back to diesel power if the
standby power is switched off or fails.
Automatic Overload Reset: The overload relay
resets automatically after the motor cools.
Phase Detect Module
Hot Gas Heat: Hot gas heat is utilized on standard
model 50 units.
Automatic Phase Correction: The control system
features two motor contactors. This allows correct
motor rotation regardless of phase rotation on the
incoming power.

17 January 2003 2-23


Section 2 — SPECTRUM Hardware Description

2-24 17 January 2003


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software
Description
Software Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
Operator Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Operator Menu Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Accessing the Operator Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Language Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Alarm Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Hourmeter Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Mode Select Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
CYCLE-SENTRY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Continuous Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Pretrip Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Diesel Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Display Brightness Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Maintenance Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Maintenance Menu Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Accessing the Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Hours Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Gauges Display Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Sensor Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Sensor Calibration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Service Test Mode Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Interface Board Test Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Display Self Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Evacuation Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Revision Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Time and Date Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Guarded Access Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Guarded Access Menu Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Programmable Feature Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Security Code Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Accessing the Guarded Access Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Programmable Features Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Temperature Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Pressure Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Restarts After Shutdown are Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Setpoint High Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Setpoint Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Fuel Saver II is Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
High Speed Pull Down Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Economy Mode is Enabled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Economy Mode Visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Running Fans in Null . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Door Open is Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Door Action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
High Speed Lockout Key is Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Sleep After Pretrip is Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Hourmeter Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13


Program Hourmeter Sub-menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Viewable Hourmeter Setup Sub-menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
CYCLE-SENTRY Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
CYCLE-SENTRY Amps Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Battery Sentry Voltage Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Defrost Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Defrost Interval In Range with Fresh Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Fresh Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Defrost Interval In Range with Frozen Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Frozen Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Maximum Defrost Duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Language Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Default Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Enable Language English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Enable Language Spanish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Enable Language French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Enable Language German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Enable Language Italian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Access Code Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Enter Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Unit Configuration Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Compressor Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Number of ETVs (Electronic Throttling Valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Electric Standby Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Auto Switch Diesel to Electric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Auto Switch Electric to Diesel Yes or No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software
Description
Software Operation
The software is a very complex set of instructions
used to operate the microprocessor. The
microprocessor examines the conditions of all the
inputs and compares them to the instructions
contained in the software. The outputs are then
energized as specified by the software
instructions.
There is no way to determine from the schematic
what conditions will cause the unit to operate in a
particular mode. This decision is made by the
microprocessor and software after examining all
the input conditions and setpoint. However,
operating mode can usually be deduced from the
existing conditions. As an example, if a 35°F
(2°C) setpoint is selected and the box temperature
as indicated by the return air sensor is 60°F
(16°C), the unit should operate in Cool mode
when turned on.
The software is flashloaded using a PC computer.
See Service Procedure A46A for details.
To check software revision of the microprocessor
and HMI control panel refer to Section 4 of this
manual.

17 January 2003 3-1


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Operator Menu Overview

3-2 17 January 2003


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Operator Menu Features Mode Select Menu


The Thermo King SPECTRUM control system This menu allows the operator to select various
features many special operator functions. These modes of operation or turn modes on and off.
functions are available from the Operator Menu. These modes should be selected as specified by
A brief explanation of each menu is included here. the customer.
For additional details see Section 4 of this manual.
CYCLE-SENTRY Mode
Accessing the Operator Menu The unit automatically starts on demand when
From the Standard Display press the MENU key. temperature control is required in any zone and
The controller will display the Operator Menu. shuts the unit down when all demands in all zones
are satisfied. The engine block temperature and
Language Selection Menu battery charge levels are also monitored and
maintained. If the block temperature falls below
If enabled, the Language Selection Menu allows 30°F (-1°C) and Diesel CYCLE-SENTRY mode
the operator to select a desired language from a is selected, the engine will start and run until the
predetermined list. For more information see block temperature is above 120°F (49°C). If the
Section 4. battery voltage falls below 12.2 volts and Diesel
CYCLE-SENTRY mode is selected, the engine
Alarm Display Menu will start and run until the battery voltage has
The Alarm Menu allows the operator to display remained above 13.6 volts for at least 7 minutes.
alarms in plain language as opposed to showing For more information see Section 4.
only an alarm code. Operator level Help screens
are available for each alarm code. The operator Continuous Mode
can also clear alarms from this menu. For more The unit runs at all times to control temperature
information see Section 4. and provide circulation in all zones. For more
information see Section 4.
Hourmeter Display Menu
The Hourmeter Menu allows the operator to check Economy Mode
the readings of all unit hour-meters that have been Economy Mode is used on selected loads that do
enabled. For more information see Section 4. not require critical temperature control. The
temperature control points are relaxed and other
features are optimized for maximum fuel
economy. This mode should be used as directed
by individual company policy. For more
information see Section 4.

17 January 2003 3-3


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Sleep Mode Diesel Mode Menu


Normal CYCLE-SENTRY mode starts and stops This menu allows the operator to switch to diesel
the unit as required to maintain the desired mode operation if the standby power fails or is
temperature in all zones, maintain the unit battery disconnected. For more information see Section 4.
in a charged condition and keep the unit engine
warm in cold ambient conditions. Sleep mode Display Brightness Menu
does not maintain zone temperatures. In Diesel
This menu allows the operator to change the
mode, Sleep mode keeps the engine warm and the
brightness of the display as required by ambient
unit battery charged. This is useful in extremely
light conditions. For more information see
cold weather or when the unit is to be out of
Section 4.
service for an extended time. In Electric Mode the
engine temperature is ignored. The unit starts and
stops only to keep the battery charged. For more
information see Section 4.

Pretrip Test Menu


A Pretrip Test verifies unit operation. This menu
allows a Pretrip Test to be initiated by the
operator. If the test is started with the engine off a
full test including amp checks is performed. If the
test is started with the engine or motor running the
amp checks are omitted. Test results are reported
as PASS, CHECK or FAIL. For more information
see Section 4.

3-4 17 January 2003


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Maintenance Menu Overview

17 January 2003 3-5


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Maintenance Menu Overview (continued)

3-6 17 January 2003


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Maintenance Menu Features Sensor Calibration Menu


The Thermo King SPECTRUM control system The Sensor Calibration Menu allows the operator
features many special technician functions. These to select the correct grade for all graded sensors.
functions are available from the Maintenance For more information see Section 4.
Menus. A brief explanation of each menu is
included here. For additional details see Section 4 Service Test Mode Menu
of this manual. Since the complexity of the control software
makes it impossible to predict exact operating
Accessing the Maintenance Menu conditions, a trouble-shooting feature called
From the Standard Display press the MENU key. Service Test Mode has been incorporated. This
The controller will display the Operator Menu. feature allows the unit to be “forced” to a known
From the first Operator Menu display (either set of operating conditions in Diesel mode,
Alarms or Language) press and hold both the regardless of setpoint or temperature sensor
EXIT key and the key with no label above it for inputs. Service personnel can now troubleshoot
5 seconds. After 5 seconds the controller will the system under defined conditions. Service Test
display the Maintenance Menu. Mode can be used with the unit running or shut
down.
Hours Display Menu When a Service Test Mode function is selected,
The Hours Menu allows the operator to check the the unit will operate in that mode for 15 minutes.
readings of all unit hour-meters that have been If no other Service Test Mode function is selected
enabled. In addition, a reset button is provided for during this time the unit will shut down and
each user programmable hourmeter. For more generate Alarm Code 54. All protection circuits
information see Section 4. operate normally in Service Test Mode.
The Service Test Mode display also shows return
Gauges Display Menu air temperature, discharge air temperature,
The Gauges Display allows the operator to display evaporator coil temperature and the calculated
unit operating information such as coolant level value for temperature differential. The Gauge
and temperature, engine RPM, battery amps, Menu is also available. For a complete list of
battery volts and suction and discharge pressure. Service Test Mode functions see Section 4.
For more information see Section 4.

Sensor Display Menu


The Sensors Display allows the operator to
display the temperature of all unit temperature
sensors and the temperature differential for each
zone. For more information see Section 4.

17 January 2003 3-7


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Interface Board Test Mode Menu Evacuation Mode Menu


Interface Board Test Mode allows individual Evacuation Mode allows a full system evacuation
relays or outputs to be energized. This permits to be performed. All normally closed valves are
service personnel to troubleshoot the system opened to allow the entire system to be evacuated
under defined conditions. Interface Board Test and charged. If battery voltage falls below
mode is used with the unit shut down. acceptable limits the operator is prompted to
connect a battery charger to maintain sufficient
Relays and outputs can all be energized
battery voltage to hold all necessary valves open
momentarily. In addition, all functions except the
during the procedure. For more information on
Preheat relay and buzzer can be locked on. If a
Evacuation Mode see Section 4.
function is locked on that function will remain
energized for 15 minutes if no other Interface
Board Test Mode function is selected. At the end Revision Display Menu
of 15 minutes, if no other function is selected the The Revision Display shows the software revision
unit will shut down and record Alarm Code 54. of both the HMI Display Panel and the unit
All protection circuits operate normally in Service Controller. For more information see Section 4.
Test Mode.
The Interface Board Test Mode display also Time and Date Display Menu
shows suction pressure, discharge pressure, amps The Time and Date Display allows the system
and battery volts. For a complete list of Interface time and date to be checked and changed as
Board Test Mode functions see Section 4. required. For more information see Section 4.

Display Self Test Menu


The Display Self Test Menu allows the operator to
perform a series of built in tests on the HMI
Control Panel. For more information see
Section 4.

3-8 17 January 2003


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Guarded Access Menu Overview

17 January 2003 3-9


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Guarded Access Menu Programmable Features Menu


Features The Programmable Features Menu allows overall
The programmable features allow unit operation unit operation to be configured to specific end
to be configured to user requirements. These user requirements. These features are set to
features are programmed thru HMI Guarded factory defaults when shipped, but can easily be
Access or a communications port interface with changed to suit the end users needs.
appropriate user access level.
Temperature Units
Programmable Feature Compare The controller can be set to display temperatures
When the unit is turned on, the programmable in either degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius.
settings stored in the controller are compared to The default setting is Fahrenheit.
the settings stored in the HMI Control Panel. If
the settings do not match, the controller settings Pressure Units
are updated to the HMI Control Panel. The controller can be set to display pressures in
PSIG, kPa or BARS. The default setting is PSI.
Security Code Protection
A security code can be set to restrict access to the
Guarded Access Menu. If a security code is set the
Technician will be prompted to enter the correct
code when accessing the Guarded Access Menu.

Accessing the Guarded Access


Menu
From the Standard Display press the MENU key.
The controller will display the Operator Menu.
From the first Operator Menu display (either
Alarms or Language) press and hold both the
EXIT key and the key with no label above it for
5 seconds. After 5 seconds the controller will
display the Maintenance Menu. Press the NEXT
key until the Time and Date Menu appears. From
the Time and Date Menu press and hold both the
EXIT key and the key with no label above it for
5 seconds. After 5 seconds the controller will
display a Security Code challenge. If no Security
Code has been set the display will show “1”. Press
the YES key to enter the Guarded Access Menu.
If a Security Code has been set the operator is
prompted to enter the correct code and press the
YES key to enter the Guarded Access Menu. If
the correct Security Code is not entered, access to
the Guarded Access Menu will be denied.

3-10 17 January 2003


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Restarts After Shutdown are Enabled Fuel Saver II is Enabled


Setting this feature Yes enables all restarts after If Fuel Saver II is set YES and the box
shutdown alarms. If a shutdown alarm occurs the temperature changes a predetermined amount
unit will restart after a set time to provide load above or below setpoint in CYCLE-SENTRY
protection. Depending on the cause of the mode operation, or temperature indicates a need
shutdown alarm unit performance may be for high speed in Continuous mode operation, the
temporarily reduced in an attempt to allow unit will first run in low speed. An 8 minute timer
continued operation. Setting this feature No will is started and the control sensor air temperature is
cause the unit to remain shut down after any monitored. As long as the temperature falls (in
shutdown alarm occurs. The default setting is Yes. cool mode operation) or rises (in heat mode
operation) a specified amount before the timer
Setpoint High Limit expires, the 8 minute timer is reset and low speed
operation continues. If the temperature has not
Setpoint High Limit allows the upper setpoint
changed the pre-determined amount when the
limit to be set to a maximum of 90°F (32°C) in
timer times out, then high speed operation is
one degree increments. The minimum setting
resumed if allowed. If the unit switches to high
available is determined by the setting of Setpoint
speed from FS-II, the zone will run in high speed
Low Limit as described below. If the driver
until setpoint is reached. If set NO, then high
attempts to select a setpoint higher than the
speed cool and high speed heat is allowed with no
Setpoint High Limit the display will show
delay. The default setting is Yes if trailer, No if
Setpoint Limit, indicating that the selected
truck.
Setpoint High Limit has been reached. Setting the
Setpoint High Limit and the Setpoint Low Limit
High Speed Pull Down Enabled
shown below to the same temperature results in a
single setpoint available to the driver. The default If High Speed Pull Down is set YES the unit will
setting is 80°F (27°C). run in high speed on initial start until setpoint is
reached in both cool and heat mode. If set NO
Setpoint Low Limit then low speed cool and low speed heat switch
points are active. The default setting is YES.
The Setpoint Low Limit allows the lower setpoint
limit to be set to a minimum of -25°F (-32°C) in
one degree increments. The maximum setting
available is determined by the setting of Setpoint
High Limit as described above. If the driver
attempts to select a setpoint lower than the
Setpoint Low Limit the display will show
Setpoint Limit, indicating that the selected
Setpoint Low Limit has been reached. Setting the
Setpoint High Limit and the Setpoint Low Limit
to the same temperature results in a single setpoint
available to the driver. The default setting is -20°F
(-29°C).

17 January 2003 3-11


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Economy Mode is Enabled Door Action


This feature allows Economy Mode to be enabled This feature allows the door switch function to be
or disabled. If Economy Mode is disabled the unit set to operate in one of the following schemes.
operates with the normal temperature control
1. Running in Null Place the zone in Running
specifications. Enabling Economy Mode relaxes
Null when the zone door is opened for 2
the temperature control specifications for
additional savings. This feature should only be seconds and allow the zone to run when zone
used as specified by the end user. The default door is closed for 5 seconds. If the unit is
setting is DISABLED. operating as a single zone or zone Running
Null is not allowed the unit will be forced to
Economy Mode Visible Null (unit off).

If Economy Mode is enabled above, the Economy 2. Null Force the zone into Null (zone off) when
Mode Visible feature is available. Setting this the zone door is opened for 2 seconds and
feature YES will add Economy Mode to the allow the zone to run 5 seconds after zone
operator selections available under the Mode door is closed. If the unit is operating as a
Menu. Setting this feature NO removes Economy single zone or zone Null is not allowed, the
Mode from the Mode Menu. The default setting is unit will be forced to Null (unit off). Door
YES. switch Null is not allowed if all other zones
are in Null.
Running Fans in Null 3. Timed Off The unit will shut down for the
This feature allows the fans in a zone to run when time interval selected by Select Time Off.
the zone is in running null to maintain airflow After this time period elapses the unit will
within the zone (normally used for fresh loads restart even if the door is still open.
only). If Running Fans in Null is set to Select Time Off This feature only appears if
ENABLED the remote compartment fans will run Timed Off operation is selected. Select Time
for 3 minutes, shut down for 3 minutes and then Off sets a time limit for door open event. If the
restart for 3 minutes as long as the zone is in null. time is exceeded, unit operation resumes even
If Running Fans in Null is set to DISABLED the if the door is still open. The time range is from
remote compartment fans will not run when the 1 to 4 hours in 10 minute increments. The
zone is in running null. The default setting is default setting is 1 hour.
DISABLED. 4. Log Only Log door opening and closing only.
No other unit action. There is a 4 second delay
Door Open is Enabled to log door open and door closed.
This feature allows the Door Open feature to be 5. Unit Off Force the unit into Null (unit off)
enabled or disabled. If Door Open is set when any door is opened for 2 seconds and
ENABLED the door switch will operate as allow the unit to run when all doors are closed
selected with the Door Action feature below. If for 5 seconds.
Door Open is set DISABLED the door switch has
no function. The default setting is DISABLED The default setting is Running in Null.

3-12 17 January 2003


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

High Speed Lockout Key is Enabled Program Hourmeter Sub-menu


This feature enables or disables the High Speed The hourmeters listed below allow a time limit to
Lockout feature. If the feature is set YES the HMI be established for each Hourmeter. These time
Control Panel High Speed Lockout key is limits are defined by the customer and are
enabled. If set NO the HMI Control Panel High typically used as maintenance reminders. The
Speed Lockout key is disabled. The default setting Program Hourmeter Sub-menu is used to set and
is YES. clear the adjustable time limits for each
Hourmeter as required by a customers
Sleep After Pretrip is Enabled maintenance program. The default time limit for
all hourmeters is 100 hours. The hourmeters
This feature enables or disables Sleep Mode after
appear in the order shown below.
a Pretrip Test. If the feature is set ENABLED the
unit will enter Sleep Mode after a Pretrip Test. If • Total Run Time Reminder # 1
the feature is set DISABLED the unit will not
• Total Run Time Reminder # 2
enter Sleep Mode after a Pretrip Test. The default
setting is DISABLED. • Controller Power On Hours
• Pretrip Reminder Hours
Hourmeter Setup Menu
• Engine Run Time Reminder # 1
The Hourmeter Setup Menu allows the unit
hourmeters to be configured to customer • Engine Run Time Reminder # 2
requirements. There are two sub-menus under the
• Electric Run Time Reminder # 1
Hourmeter Setup Menu.
• Electric Run Time Reminder # 2

17 January 2003 3-13


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Viewable Hourmeter Setup Sub-menu CYCLE-SENTRY Setup Menu


The hourmeters can also be programmed to be The CYCLE-SENTRY Menu allows the unit
visible or hidden to the operator. The hourmeters defaults for CYCLE-SENTRY shut down on
continue to accumulate time even if the hourmeter battery charge current and starts on battery
view is hidden. The default setting for all voltage to be modified as required by end user
hourmeters is DISABLE. The hourmeters appear requirements.
in the order shown below.
CYCLE-SENTRY Amps Level
• Total Hours Viewing
When operating in CYCLE-SENTRY or Sleep
• Total Run Hours Viewing
mode the unit will continue to run to charge the
• Controller Power On Hours Viewing battery until the charging current falls below this
set limit. This occurs even if no zones require
• Engine Run Time Viewing
cooling, heating or defrosting. Choices range from
• Electric Run Time Viewing 2 thru 8 amps in 1 amp increments. The default
setting is 5 amps.
• Zone 1 Run Time Viewing
• Zone 2 Run Time Viewing Battery Sentry Voltage Level
When operating in CYCLE-SENTRY or Sleep
mode the controller will monitor battery voltage
and restart the unit to charge the battery if the
battery voltage falls below this set limit. This
occurs even if no zones require cooling, heating or
defrosting. Choices range from 11.8 volts thru
12.6 volts in 0.1 volt increments. The default
setting is 12.2 volts.

3-14 17 January 2003


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Defrost Setup Menu Language Setup Menu


The Defrost Setup Menu allows the defrost cycle This menu allows the display language to be
to be configured for maximum performance. selected as required. Currently English, Spanish,
French, German and Italian are supported. When a
Defrost Interval In Range with Fresh language is selected all subsequent displays are in
Setpoint the language.
This feature selects the timed interval between
Default Language
defrost cycles with fresh range setpoints when the
temperature is in-range. Choices are 2, 4, 6, 8 or This feature allows the default language to be
12 hours. The default setting is 6 hours. selected. The default language is the language that
will appear when the unit is first turned on.
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Fresh Choices are English, Spanish, French, German
Setpoint and Italian. The default setting is English.
This feature selects the timed interval between
Enable Language English
defrost cycles with fresh range setpoints when the
temperature is not in-range. Choices are 2, 4, 6, 8 If more than one language is enabled the operator
or 12 hours. The default setting is 4 hours. has the option to select the desired language from
the Operator Menu. This display allows English to
Defrost Interval In Range with Frozen be enabled or disabled. If English is enabled a
Setpoint DISABLE soft key will be present. Pressing this
key will disable English and an Enable soft key
This feature selects the timed interval between
will appear. Pressing this key will enable English.
defrost cycles with frozen range setpoints when
The default setting for English is Enabled.
the temperature is in-range. Choices are 2, 4, 6, 8
or 12 hours. The default setting is 6 hours.
Enable Language Spanish
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Frozen If more than one language is enabled the operator
Setpoint has the option to select the desired language from
the Operator Menu. This display allows Spanish
This feature selects the timed interval between
to be enabled or disabled. If Spanish is enabled a
defrost cycles with frozen range setpoints when
DISABLE soft key will be present. Pressing this
the temperature is not in-range. Choices are 2, 4,
key will disable Spanish and an Enable soft key
6, 8 or 12 hours. The default setting is 4 hours.
will appear. Pressing this key will enable Spanish.
The default setting for Spanish is Disabled.
Maximum Defrost Duration
This feature selects the maximum time the unit
can remain in a defrost cycle. Choices are 30 or 45
minutes. The default setting is 45 minutes.

17 January 2003 3-15


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Enable Language French Access Code Setup Menu


If more than one language is enabled the operator This menu allows the Access code for entry to the
has the option to select the desired language from Guarded Access Menu
the Operator Menu. This display allows French to
be enabled or disabled. If French is enabled a Enter Access Code
DISABLE soft key will be present. Pressing this
The + and – keys are used to change the Access
key will disable French and an Enable soft key
Code as desired. The code should be recorded for
will appear. Pressing this key will enable French.
use by authorized personnel.
The default setting for French is Disabled.

Enable Language German


If more than one language is enabled the operator
has the option to select the desired language from
the Operator Menu. This display allows German
to be enabled or disabled. If German is enabled a
DISABLE soft key will be present. Pressing this
key will disable German and an Enable soft key
will appear. Pressing this key will enable German.
The default setting for German is Disabled.

Enable Language Italian


If more than one language is enabled the operator
has the option to select the desired language from
the Operator Menu. This display allows Italian to
be enabled or disabled. If Italian is enabled a
DISABLE soft key will be present. Pressing this
key will disable Italian and an Enable soft key
will appear. Pressing this key will enable Italian.
The default setting for Italian is Disabled.

3-16 17 January 2003


Section 3 — SPECTRUM Software Description

Unit Configuration Setup Menu Auto Switch Diesel to Electric


The Unit Setup Menu is used to specify the actual This feature allows the Auto Switch from Diesel
unit configuration. to Electric to be enabled or disabled. Enabling this
feature allows unit to switch automatically to
Compressor Type electric mode when standby power is connected.
Default is No if trailer, Yes if truck.
This feature allows the compressor type to be
selected. Choices are Scroll or Reciprocating. The
Auto Switch Electric to Diesel Yes or No
default setting is Scroll.
This feature allows the Auto Switch from Electric
Number of ETVs (Electronic Throttling to Diesel to be enabled or disabled. Enabling this
Valves) feature allows unit to switch automatically to
diesel mode when standby power is disconnected.
This feature allows the number of ETVs
Default is No.
(Electronic Throttling Valves) to be specified.
Choices are No ETVs or 1 ETV. The default
Zones
setting is No ETVs.
This feature specifies the number of zones
Electric Standby Equipped installed. The default setting is 2 Zones.
This feature specifies if the unit is equipped with
optional electric standby. Choices are Yes or No.
If the unit is equipped with electric standby this
feature must be set Yes. If the unit is not equipped
with electric standby this feature should be set No.
The default setting is Yes.

17 January 2003 3-17


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

HMI Control Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1


Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Turning the Unit On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
The Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Selecting a Zone Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Turning a Zone On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Changing the Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Starting the Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Terminating a Defrost Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Selecting High Speed Lockout (if enabled) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Operator Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Using the Operator Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Operator Menu Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Selecting a Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Alarm Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Log Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Check Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Prevent Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Shutdown Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
SPECTRUM Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Viewing and Clearing Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Viewing Hourmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Selecting CYCLE-SENTRY or Continuous Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Selecting Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Selecting Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Pretrip Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Performing a Pretrip Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
Selecting Diesel or Electric Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53
Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55
Single Temperature Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57
Maintenance Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58
Using the Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60
Maintenance Menu Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62
Using the Hourmeters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64
Using the Gauges Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67
Using the Temperature Sensor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70
Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Temperature Sensor Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74


Using the Service Test Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-78
Service Test Mode Operating States and Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-82
Operation of Multi-Temperature Unit Solenoids and Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-83
Using the Interface Board Test Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-84
Interface Board Test Mode Operating States and Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
Using the Display Self Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89
Display Self Test Names and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91
Using the Evacuation Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-92
Using the Software Revision Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-95
Using the Set Time and Date Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-97
Guarded Access Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-99
Using the Guarded Access Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100
Guarded Access Menu Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102
Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation
HMI Control Panel Features
The HMI (Human/Machine Interface) Control Panel is connected to the microprocessor and is used to
operate the unit. It may be located in the truck dashboard using a DIN mounting ring or under the
dashboard using an under dash mounting kit.

The HMI control panel consists of a display and 8 touch sensitive keys. The display is capable of
showing both text and graphics. The two keys on the left and right sides of the display are dedicated keys
as explained below. The four keys under the display are “soft” keys. The function of these keys change
depending on the operation being performed. If a soft key is active the current key function will be shown
in the display directly above the key.

Display
The display is used to supply unit information to the
operator. This information includes setpoint and
temperature for all installed zones, zone operating
information, unit gauge readings, system temperatures
and other information as selected by the operator. The
Standard Display of box temperature and setpoint for 2
zones is shown here. In the display shown here the unit
is running in CYCLE-SENTRY Mode, Zone 1 has a
setpoint of –10°F and an actual box temperature of –
9.4°F. Zone 2 has a setpoint of 35°F and an actual box
temperature of 35.8°F. The two arrows show that both
zones are cooling.

17 January 2003 4-1


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Keys
This key is used to turn the unit on. The Thermo King Logo screen will appear briefly
and the display will then show the Standard Display of box temperature and setpoint for
each zone. For more information see “Turning the Unit On and Off” later in this section.

This key is used to turn the unit off. The unit will enter the power-down sequence when
this key is pressed. For more information see “Turning the Unit On and Off” later in this
section.

This key is used to initiate a manual defrost cycle. For more information see “Initiating a
Manual Defrost Cycle” later in this section.

This key is used to lock out high speed operation in noise sensitive areas. For more
information see “Selecting High Speed Lockout” later in this section.

The four “soft” keys under the display are multi-purpose keys. Their function changes
depending on the operation being performed. If a soft key is active the key function will
be shown in the display directly above the key.

Typical Soft key applications:

ZONE MENU
NEXT PREVIOUS
YES NO
+ -
UP DOWN
SELECT EXIT
CLEAR HELP
HOUR METERS SENSORS
GAUGES ABORT

4-2 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Turning the Unit On and Off


The unit is turned on by pressing the ON key and off by pressing the OFF key. When the On key is
pressed the display will briefly show the THERMO KING Logo as the display initializes.

Then the startup screen shown below appears while communications are established and the unit prepares
for operation.

When the unit is ready to run the Standard Display will appear.

17 January 2003 4-3


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Turning the Unit On and Off - (continued)


Pressing the OFF key stops unit operation.

The unit will shut down and the display will briefly show OFF. The display will then go blank.

4-4 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

The Standard Display


The Standard Display is the default display that appears if no other display function is selected. The
Standard Display shows the box temperature and setpoint or OFF for all installed zones. The box
temperature is that measured by the controlling sensor, usually the return air sensor. A two zone
application is shown here. The temperature in Zone 1 is –9.4°F with a –10°F setpoint. The temperature in
Zone 2 is 35.8°F with a 35°F setpoint. The top of the display shows that the unit is operating in
CYCLE-SENTRY mode. The two arrows indicate that both zones are cooling.

If OFF appears below the box temperature as shown below for Zone 2, then the zone has been turned off.
If the setpoint appears the zone is turned on, as shown below for Zone 1.

The soft key labeled Zone 1 is used to select the Zone 1 Display, the Zone 2 soft key selects Zone 2
Display, and the Menu soft key selects the Main Menu Display. The unlabeled soft key is not used from
the Standard Display.

17 January 2003 4-5


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting a Zone Display


To select a zone from the Standard Display, press the soft key for the desired zone. Zone 1 will be
selected here.

When a Zone soft key is pressed the Zone Display shown below will appear. The zone display allows the
operator to change the zone setpoint and turn the zone on and off. To return to the Standard Display press
the soft key labeled EXIT. If no key is pressed the display will return to the Standard Display after 30
seconds.

The soft keys labeled “–” and “+” are used to change the setpoint.
The Turn Zone X On/Off soft key identifies the zone being displayed and indicates if the zone is on or off.
If the zone being shown by the Zone Display is currently turned on the third soft key will be labeled
“TURN ZONE X OFF”. If the zone is currently turned off the third soft key will be labeled “TURN
ZONE X ON”. Zone 1 is currently turned on in the illustration shown above.
Pressing the EXIT soft key returns the display to the Standard Display.

4-6 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Turning a Zone On and Off


At the Standard Display, press the soft key to show the Zone Display for the desired zone.

If the zone shown by the Zone Display is currently turned on the third soft key will be labeled “TURN
ZONE X OFF”, where X is the zone number. If the zone is currently turned off the third soft key will be
labeled “TURN ZONE X ON”. Zone 1 is shown on the display below, with the zone turned on.

Pressing the TURN ZONE 1 OFF key will turn Zone 1 off, and the soft key label will then read TURN
ZONE 1 ON as shown below. Pressing the key again will turn the zone back on.

17 January 2003 4-7


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Turning a Zone On and Off – (continued)


When the zone is turned on or off the display will briefly indicate that the change is being made as shown
below.

The display will show the new zone setting for several seconds as shown below.

The display then returns to the Zone Display. Pressing the TURN ZONE 1 ON key will turn the zone
back on.

Pressing the EXIT key will return to the Standard Display. If no keys are pressed the display will return
to the Standard Display after 30 seconds.

4-8 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Changing the Setpoint


At the Standard Display, press the soft key to show the Zone Display for the desired zone.

The display below shows the Zone 2 display with a setpoint of 35°F. The Zone is turned on as shown
previously.

Pressing the “-” and/or “+” soft keys changes the display to the Setpoint Display for the selected zone.
The display title changes and the YES and NO soft keys appear as shown below. The “+” and “-” soft
keys are used to increase or decrease the setpoint. Here the setpoint has been changed to 40°F using the
“+” key.

17 January 2003 4-9


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Changing the Setpoint – (continued)


The YES and NO soft keys confirm the setpoint change. When the desired setpoint has been selected
using the “+” and/or “-” keys, press the YES soft key to confirm and load the new setpoint. If the setpoint
is changed using the “+” or “-” keys, the change must confirmed or rejected by pressing the YES or NO
soft key within 10 seconds of changing the setpoint. Failure to confirm the new setpoint by pressing Yes
or No within 10 seconds of changing the setpoint will result in Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered.

After the YES soft key has been pressed the display will briefly show PROGRAMMING NEW
SETPOINT.

4-10 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Changing the Setpoint – (continued)


The display then confirms the new setpoint for several seconds.

The display then returns to the Standard Display showing the new setpoint. Notice that the Zone 2 arrow
now points up to indicate the zone is heating

IMPORTANT: If the setpoint is changed using the “+” or “-” keys, the change must be confirmed or
rejected by pressing the YES or NO soft key within 10 seconds of changing the setpoint.
• If the YES key is pressed, the setpoint change made with the “+” or “-” keys will be accepted, the
setpoint will be changed and the display will return to the Standard Display.
• If the NO key is pressed the setpoint change made with the “+” or “-” keys will not be accepted, the
setpoint will not be changed and the display will return to the Setpoint Display.

17 January 2003 4-11


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Changing the Setpoint – (continued)


• If the YES or NO key is not pressed within 10 seconds of making a change with the “+” or “-” keys,
the setpoint will not be changed and the display will return to the Setpoint Display. The display will
briefly show [SETPOINT NOT CHANGED] and Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered will be set
to indicate that the setpoint change was started but not completed.

4-12 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Starting the Diesel Engine


Diesel engine preheats and starts are automatic in both Continuous Mode and CYCLE-SENTRY Mode.
The engine will preheat and start if necessary when the unit is turned on. The engine preheat and start will
be delayed in CYCLE-SENTRY mode if there is no current need for the engine to run. If any keys are
being pressed on the HMI the engine will preheat and start 10 seconds after the last key is pressed.

CAUTION: The engine may start automatically any time the unit is turned on.

WARNING: Never use starting fluid.

When the engine is preparing to start the HMI will display the engine start screen as shown below.

17 January 2003 4-13


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle


Defrost cycles are usually initiated automatically based on time or demand. Manual defrost is also
available.
Manual defrost is available if the unit is running, the zone is turned on and the zone coil temperature is
less than 45°F (7°C). Only one zone can be in defrost at a time. Other features such as door switch
settings may not allow manual defrost under some conditions. To initiate a manual defrost cycle, press
the Defrost Key as shown below. The display will prompt for the desired zone.

Press the soft key to select the zone to defrost as shown below. Pressing the indicated soft key will initiate
a defrost cycle in Zone 1.

4-14 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle - continued


The display will briefly show [PROGRAMMING DEFROST] and then briefly show [ZONE “X”
DEFROST STARTED], where “X” is the number of the selected zone. Zone 1 has started defrost as
shown below.

The display will then return to the Standard Display as shown below. The zone in defrost will show
“DEF” instead of setpoint as shown below. The bar indicator below “DEF” will show approximately how
much time remains to complete the defrost cycle. The bar indicator below shows that the defrost cycle is
about 25% complete.

Terminating a Defrost Cycle


The defrost cycle will terminate automatically when the coil temperature is greater than 52°F (11°C) or
the defrost timer expires. Defrost can also be terminated by turning the unit off and back on.

17 January 2003 4-15


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting High Speed Lockout (if enabled)


If enabled, high speed operation can be locked out if required in noise sensitive areas.
NOTE: High Speed Lock Out Enable must be programmed [YES] or this feature will not be available.
The High Speed Lockout key is a toggle. If high speed is enabled, then pressing the key will disable high
speed operation. Pressing the key again will enable high speed operation. To change the setting press the
High Speed Lockout key as shown below.

The display will briefly show [PROGRAMMING HIGH SPEED LOCKOUT – PLEASE WAIT].

4-16 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting High Speed Lockout - (continued)


The change is confirmed by briefly displaying [HIGH SPEED LOCKOUT ACTIVE] or [HIGH SPEED
LOCKOUT INACTIVE].

The display will then return to the Standard Display. If High Speed Lockout is turned on, the message
HIGH SPEED LOCKOUT ACTIVE will replace the CYCLE-SENTRY/CONTINUOUS indication at the
top of the display.

Pressing the High Speed Lockout key again will turn the feature off.

17 January 2003 4-17


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Operator Menu Overview

4-18 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Operator Menu


The Operator Menu contains several additional menus that allow the operator to view information and
modify unit operation. To access the Operator Menu press the MENU key.

The first menu choice will appear. Press the NEXT and PREVIOUS keys to scroll through the menu
choices. When the desired choice is shown on the display, press the SELECT key to access it. The
MODE Menu is shown here.

The Operator Menu choices are shown on the next page. For detailed information see the individual
explanations of each menu item on the following pages.
To return to the Standard Display press the EXIT key.

17 January 2003 4-19


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Operator Menu Choices


Language Menu: If enabled, allows the operator to select a language from a list of 5 languages. All other
subsequent displays are shown in the selected language. English is the default language.
Alarm Menu: Shows any active alarms, and allows alarms to be cleared.
Hourmeter Menu: Allows the operator to view the unit hourmeters that have the view feature turned on. If
the view feature for an hourmeter is not turned on, that hourmeter can not be viewed.

Total Unit Hours Total Run Hours Total Engine Hours Total Electric Hours

Total Zone 1 Run Hours Total Zone 2 Run Hours Total Zone 3 Run Hours Maint. Total Hours 1

Maint. Total Hours 2 Controller On Hours Maint. Pretrip Hours Maint. Engine Hours 1

Maint. Engine Hours 2 Maint. Electric Hours 1 Maint. Electric Hours 2

Mode Menu: Allows the operator to change the unit operating modes.
CYCLE-SENTRY Mode.
Continuous Mode.
Economy Mode.
Sleep Mode.
Pretrip Menu: Allows the operator to start a Pretrip.
Diesel/Electric Menu: If enabled, allows the operator to select diesel or electric mode operation.
Display Intensity: Allows the operator to adjust the display intensity as required by conditions.

4-20 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting a Language
If the Language feature is enabled an alternate language can be selected from the Operator Menu. After a
new language is chosen all displays will appear in that language. If the language feature is not enabled
this menu does not appear.
Languages currently supported are English, German, Spanish, French and Italian. The default language is
English. Only languages that have been enabled in the Guarded Access Menu will appear on this menu.
To select an alternate language, press the MENU key.

The Language Menu is the first menu item to appear as shown below. Press the SELECT key to chose the
Language menu.

17 January 2003 4-21


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting a Language - (continued)


The Language menu will appear as shown below. Press the + or – keys to select the desired language.

When the desired language is shown press the YES key to confirm the choice.

The display will briefly show PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE – PLEASE WAIT

4-22 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting a Language - (continued)


The display will then return to the Language menu.

To select a different Operator Menu item press the NEXT key. To return to the Standard Display press the
EXIT key.

17 January 2003 4-23


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Alarm Codes Prevent Alarms


Alarms may be one of four types as shown below. Prevent Alarms are indicated at the top of the
If an alarm applies only to a specific zone, that Standard Display with the statement [UNIT IN
zone will be displayed with the alarm code. PREVENT MODE]. The Alarm Display must be
used to view the existing alarms. The unit may
Log Alarms wait a timed restart interval or until conditions
allow and then restart. If the unit is in a restart
Log Alarms are indicated at the top of the interval Alarm Code 84 Restart Null will be
Standard Display for 30 seconds each time the present along with the Prevent Alarm. In other
unit is turned on. The alarm indication will go off cases the unit may restart or run with reduced
after 30 seconds. The Alarm Display must be used performance to determine if continued operation
to view the existing alarms. This level of alarm is possible. If the alarm does not reoccur with
serves as a notice to take corrective action before reduced performance the unit will then return to
a problem becomes severe. Maintenance items full performance. If the unit is operating with
such as maintenance hourmeter time-outs are log reduced performance Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit
alarms. Operation will also be present. If the alarm
condition re-occurs a set number of times the
Check Alarms alarm is set as a shutdown alarm and no further
Check Alarms are indicated at the top of the restarts are possible. If an alarm applies only to a
Standard Display with the statement [SERVICE specific zone, that zone will be displayed with the
REQUIRED WITHIN 24 HOURS]. The Alarm alarm code.
Display must be used to view the existing alarms.
This level of alarm serves as a notice to take Shutdown Alarms
corrective action before a problem becomes Shutdown Alarms replace the Standard Display
severe. The unit will run with check alarms but with a flashing Alarm Display and the statement
some features and functions may be inhibited. If [UNIT NOT RUNNING – SERVICE
an alarm applies only to a specific zone, that zone REQUIRED]. The flashing display shows the
will be displayed with the alarm code. On a alarm that caused the shutdown. Shutdown alarms
multi-temp application if a zone specific problem will force the unit into shutdown. The unit will
is severe the zone will shut down but the alarm is remain in shutdown until the shutdown alarm is
set as a check alarm to allow the other zones to cleared. Exceptions are some engine and electric
continue to run. If severe problems occur in all shutdown alarms that become log alarms when
zones the unit will shut down. switched to the alternate operating mode (diesel to
electric or electric to diesel).

4-24 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Alarm Codes – (continued)


Special Considerations
Pretrip Alarm Codes
If an alarm occurs during a Pretrip Test the alarm
code will be displayed as Pretrip Alarm XX,
where XX is the alarm code.

Alarm Codes and Switching Modes from


Diesel to Electric or Electric to Diesel
If a shutdown alarm occurs that affects only diesel
mode operation and the unit is switched to
electric, the diesel mode shutdown alarm becomes
an electric mode log alarm. This allows the unit to
run in electric mode without clearing the
shutdown alarm that is preventing diesel mode
operation. If the unit is switched back to diesel
mode, the alarm again becomes a diesel mode
shutdown alarm and prevents unit operation.
In the same manner, if a shutdown alarm occurs
that affects only electric mode operation and the
unit is switched to diesel, the electric mode
shutdown alarm becomes a diesel mode log alarm
to allow diesel mode operation. If the unit is
switched back to electric mode, the alarm reverts
to an electric mode shutdown alarm and prevents
unit operation.

17 January 2003 4-25


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

SPECTRUM Alarm Codes

Code Description Operator Help

00 No Alarms

2 Evaporator Coil Sensor Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of
the day.

3 Return Air Sensor Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of
the day.

4 Discharge Air Sensor Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of
the day.

5 Ambient Air Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.

6 Engine Coolant Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.

7 Engine RPM Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.

9 High Evaporator Temperature Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of
the day.

10 High Discharge Pressure If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

11 Alternate Control Sensor Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of
the day.

12 Sensor Shutdown The indicated zone is not longer able to operate and has been
shut down. Repair immediately.

13 Sensor Check Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of


the day.

15 Check Glow Plugs/Intake Heater If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

17 Engine Failed to Crank If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

4-26 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Code Description Operator Help

18 High Engine Coolant Temperature If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

19 Low Engine Oil Pressure If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

20 Engine Failed to Start If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

21 Cooling Cycle Check Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of
the day.

22 Heating Cycle Check Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of
the day.

23 Cooling Cycle Fault The indicated zone is no longer able to operate and has been
shut down. Repair immediately.

24 Heating Cycle Fault The indicated zone is no longer able to operate and has been
shut down. Repair immediately.

25 Alternator Check If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report


alarm at end of the day.

26 Refrigeration Capacity Check Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of
the day.

28 Pretrip Abort Report alarm at end of the day.

29 Defrost Damper Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report

(Not Currently Used) alarm at end of the day.

31 Oil Pressure Switch If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

32 Refrigeration Capacity Shutdown The indicated zone is no longer able to operate and has been
shut down. Repair immediately.

33 Check Engine RPM Report alarm at end of the day.

17 January 2003 4-27


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Code Description Operator Help

35 Run Relay Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

36 Electric Motor Failed to Run If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

37 Engine Coolant Level Report alarm at end of the day.

38 Electric Phase Reversed If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

40 High Speed Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

42 Unit Forced to Low Speed Report alarm at end of the day.

44 Check Fuel System If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.
(Not Currently Used)

45 Hot Gas Bypass Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

48 Check Belts/Clutch If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report


alarm at end of the day.

50 Reset Clock Report alarm at end of the day.

52 Check Hot Gas Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

54 Test Mode Timeout Service Test or Interface Board Test timed out after 15
minutes. Report alarm at end of the day.

61 Low Battery Voltage If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

62 Ammeter Out of Calibration If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

4-28 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Code Description Operator Help

63 Engine Stopped If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report


alarm at end of the day.

64 Pretrip Reminder Report alarm at end of the day.

66 Low Engine Oil Level Check engine oil level. If unit is shut down repair immediately.
Otherwise, report alarm at end of the day.

67 Liquid Line Solenoid Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

68 Controller Fault Report alarm at end of the day.

70 Hourmeter Failure Report alarm at end of the day.

74 Controller Reset to Defaults Report alarm at end of the day.

79 Data Log Overflow Report alarm at end of the day.

80 Compressor Temperature Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.

82 High Compressor Temperature If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

84 Restart Null Report alarm at end of the day.

85 Forced Unit Operation Report alarm at end of the day.

86 Discharge Pressure Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.

87 Suction Pressure Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.

17 January 2003 4-29


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Code Description Operator Help

89 ETV Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report


alarm at end of the day.
(Not Currently Used)

90 Electric Overload If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report


alarm at end of the day.

91 Electric Ready Input If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

92 Sensor Grades Not Set Report alarm at end of the day.

93 Low Compressor Suction If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

94 Unloader #1 If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report


alarm at end of the day.
(Not Currently Used)

95 Unloader #2 If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report


alarm at end of the day.
(Not Currently Used)

99 High Pressure Ratio If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.
(Not Currently Used)

104 Check Remote Fan Speed Report alarm at end of the day.

(Not Currently Used)

105 Rcvr Tank Pressure Solenoid If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Circuit alarm at end of the day.

106 Purge Valve Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

107 Condenser Inlet Solenoid If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

108 Door Open Timeout Close Doors. Report alarm at end of the day.

110 Suction Line Solenoid Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

4-30 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Code Description Operator Help

111 Unit Configuration Report alarm at end of the day.

112 Check Remote Fans If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

114 Many Alarms – Can Not Run If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

115 High Pressure Cutout Switch If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

116 High Pressure Cut In Switch Report alarm at end of the day.

(Not Currently Used)

117 Autoswitch to Electric Report alarm at end of the day.

118 Autoswitch to Diesel Report alarm at end of the day.

120 Alternator Exciter Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

121 Liquid Injection Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

122 Diesel/Electric Relay Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.

127 Setpoint Not Entered Be sure the setpoint is set to the required temperature.

128 Engine Reminder #1 Report alarm at end of the day.

129 Engine Reminder #2 Report alarm at end of the day.

130 Electric Reminder #1 Report alarm at end of the day.

17 January 2003 4-31


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Code Description Operator Help

131 Electric Reminder #2 Report alarm at end of the day.

132 Unit Run Reminder #1 Report alarm at end of the day.

133 Unit Run Reminder #2 Report alarm at end of the day.

134 Power On Hours Report alarm at end of the day.

4-32 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Viewing and Clearing Alarm Codes


If an alarm condition occurs an alarm message will appear in place of the mode indication in the display
as shown below.

Alarms are displayed and cleared using the Alarm Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU
key.

The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. If the Language Menu appears press the NEXT key to
show the Alarm Menu. When the Alarm Menu is shown press the SELECT key.

17 January 2003 4-33


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Viewing and Clearing Alarm Codes – (continued)


The Alarm Display will appear. If no alarms are present NO ALARMS will be shown.

If alarms are present, the quantity of alarms (if more than one) and the most recent alarm code number
will be shown. If the alarm pertains to a specific zone, that zone will be identified. In the example below,
there are two alarms present. The most recent is Alarm Code 3 in Zone 2. It indicates a problem with the
return air sensor.

After the alarm situation is resolved press the CLEAR key to clear the alarm. For additional information
regarding the alarm shown on the display press the HELP key. To display the next alarm, press the NEXT
key.

4-34 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Viewing and Clearing Alarm Codes – (continued)


If a serious condition occurs, the unit will be shut down to prevent damage to the unit or the load. If this
occurs, the display will show that the unit is shut down and display the alarm code that caused the
shutdown. In the example below, the unit is shut down due to low oil level. For additional information
regarding the alarm shown on the display press the HELP key.

A help message will appear. For the alarm shown above, the message “CHECK OIL LEVEL. IF UNIT
IS SHUT DOWN, REPAIR IMMEDIATELY. OTHERWISE, REPORT ALARM AT END OF THE
DAY” will be shown on the display. Check the oil level and add oil as required, clear the alarm and
restart the engine.
To select a different Operator Menu item press the NEXT key. To return to the Standard Display press the
EXIT key.

17 January 2003 4-35


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Viewing Hourmeters
Hourmeters are displayed using the Hourmeter Display. From the Standard Display, press the MENU
key.

The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Hourmeter
Menu. When the Hourmeter Menu is shown press the SELECT key. The Hourmeter Display will appear.

Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS key to scroll through the hourmeters.

4-36 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Viewing Hourmeters – (continued)


Hourmeter names and definitions are shown below in the order they appear. Only hourmeters enabled in
the Guarded Access Menu will be shown. To return to the Standard Display, press the EXIT key.
HOURMETER NAMES AND DEFINITIONS

Hourmeter Name Definition

Total Hours Total number of hours the unit has been turned on (protection hours).

Total Run Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in both diesel and electric mode.

Engine Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in diesel mode.

Electric Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in electric mode.

Zone 1 Run Hours Total number of hours that Zone 1 has run in both diesel and electric mode.
Includes running null time.

Zone 2 Run Hours Total number of hours that Zone 2 has run in both diesel and electric mode.
Includes running null time.

Total Maintenance Hours 1 User Programmable – The number of hours before a Total Hours
Maintenance Reminder 1 occurs.

Total Maintenance Hours 2 User Programmable – The number of hours before a Total Hours
Maintenance Reminder 2 occurs.

Total Controller Hours Total hours the controller and HMI control panel have been turned on.

Pretrip Reminder Hours User Programmable – number of hours before a Pretrip Reminder occurs.

Engine Maintenance Hours 1 User Programmable – The number of hours before an Engine Hours
Maintenance Reminder 1 occurs.

Engine Maintenance Hours 2 User Programmable – The number of hours before an Engine Hours
Maintenance Reminder 2 occurs.

Electric Maintenance Hours 1 User Programmable – The number of hours before an Electric Hours
Maintenance Reminder 1 occurs.

Electric Maintenance Hours 2 User Programmable – The number of hours before an Electric Hours
Maintenance Reminder 2 occurs.

IMPORTANT: If a programmable hourmeter is not enabled and/or the view for that hourmeter is not
turned on it will not appear in the display sequence.

17 January 2003 4-37


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting CYCLE-SENTRY or Continuous Mode


When CYCLE-SENTRY mode is selected the unit will start and stop automatically to maintain setpoint
in all compartments, keep the engine warm and the battery charged. When Continuous Mode is selected,
the unit will start automatically and run continuously to maintain setpoint and provide constant airflow.
CYCLE-SENTRY and Continuous Mode are selected using the Mode Menu. From the Standard Display,
press the MENU key.

The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Mode
Menu. When the Mode Menu is shown press the SELECT key.

4-38 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting CYCLE-SENTRY or Continuous Mode - (continued)


In the display shown below, the unit is operating in CYCLE-SENTRY mode and the option exists to
switch to Continuous mode. Pressing the Select key will switch the mode from CYCLE-SENTRY to
Continuous.

Pressing the Select key will change the mode from CYCLE-SENTRY to Continuous. The display will
confirm the change as shown below.

The new mode is then confirmed for 10 seconds.

17 January 2003 4-39


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting CYCLE-SENTRY or Continuous Mode - (continued)


The display then returns to the Mode Menu. In the example here the unit is currently running in
Continuous mode. Pressing the Select key again allows the operator to change back to CYCLE-SENTRY
mode operation.

IMPORTANT: If the unit is in CYCLE-SENTRY null and the mode is switched to Continuous Mode,
the unit will start automatically.

4-40 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting Economy Mode


Economy Mode is used on selected loads that do not require critical temperature control. The
temperature control points are relaxed and other features are optimized for maximum fuel economy. This
mode should be used as directed by individual company policy. Economy Mode can be turned on or off
as required.
Economy Mode is turned On and Off using the Mode Menu. From the Standard Display, press the
MENU key.

The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Mode
Menu. When the Mode Menu is shown press the SELECT key.

17 January 2003 4-41


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting Economy Mode – (continued)


Press the Next key as required to display Economy Mode. In the display shown below, Economy Mode is
turned off and the option exists to turn Economy mode on. Pressing the Select key will turn Economy
Mode on.

Pressing the Select key will turn Economy Mode on. The display will confirm the change as shown
below.

The new mode is then confirmed for 10 seconds.

4-42 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting Economy Mode - (continued)


The display then returns to the Mode Menu. In the example here Economy Mode is currently turned on.
Pressing the Select key again allows the operator to turn Economy Mode off.

17 January 2003 4-43


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting Sleep Mode


Normal CYCLE-SENTRY mode starts and stops the unit as required to maintain the desired temperature
in all zones, maintain the unit battery in a charged condition and keep the unit engine warm in cold
ambient conditions. Sleep mode does not maintain zone temperatures – it only keeps the engine warm and
the unit battery charged. This is useful in extremely cold weather or when the unit is to be out of service
for an extended time. Sleep mode operates in both Diesel mode and Electric mode. In Diesel mode the
unit will start and stop as required to maintain engine temperature and battery charge. In Electric mode
the unit starts and stops as necessary to maintain battery charge only.
When Sleep mode is entered, the operator can program an automatic Wake-up Time up to a week away.
Using this feature, the unit will automatically restart and run normally at the determined time. If a
Wake-up Time is programmed the operator can also program an automatic Pretrip Test when the unit
restarts.
Sleep Mode is turned On and Off using the Mode Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU
key.

The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Mode
Menu. When the Mode Menu is shown press the SELECT key.

4-44 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting Sleep Mode – (continued)


Press the Next key as required to display the Sleep Mode prompt.

Press the Select key to choose the Sleep Mode menu.

The operator can now choose a Sleep Mode Wake-up Time or simply enter Sleep Mode immediately. If
NO is pressed the unit will immediately enter Sleep Mode.

17 January 2003 4-45


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting Sleep Mode – (continued)


The display will show SLEEP and the unit will start and stop as required to keep the engine warm and/or
the battery charged. Sleep mode does not maintain zone temperatures. To exit Sleep Mode press the
EXIT key or turn the unit off and back on. The unit will resume normal operation and control to setpoint.

To enter a Wake-up Time verify the unit clock is set properly. Then press the YES key at the Sleep Mode
menu.

The display will prompt the operator for the DAY the unit is to restart in normal operation. In this
example Monday has been chosen. Press the YES key to confirm the DAY.

4-46 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting Sleep Mode – (continued)


The display will now prompt the operator for the Hour the unit is to restart in normal operation. In this
example 4:00 am has been chosen. Press the YES key to confirm the HOUR. Note that 24 hour “military
time” is used.

The display will now prompt the operator for the MINUTE the unit is to restart in normal operation. In
this example 4:30 am has been chosen. Press the YES key to confirm the MINUTE.

The display will now prompt for a Pretrip Test on Wake-up. Press the YES key to perform a Pretrip Test
on Wake-up. If the No key is pressed the unit will resume normal operation on Wake-up.

17 January 2003 4-47


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting Sleep Mode – (continued)


The display will show SLEEP and the unit will start and stop as required to keep the engine warm and/or
the battery charged. Sleep mode does not maintain zone temperatures.

The unit will restart at the programmed time (in this example 4:30 am) and perform a Pretrip Test (if
selected). After the Pretrip Test is complete the test results will be displayed and the unit will resume
normal operation and control to setpoint.
To exit Sleep Mode before the selected Wake-up time press the EXIT key or turn the unit off and back on.
The unit will resume normal operation and control to setpoint.

4-48 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Pretrip Tests
A Pretrip Test verifies unit operation. This display allows a Pretrip Test to be selected and initiated by the
operator. If the Pretrip Test is entered with the unit shut down a Full Pretrip Test with device amp checks
will be performed. If the Pretrip Test is entered with the unit running in either diesel or electric mode a
Partial Pretrip Test is performed. Test results are reported as PASS, CHECK or FAIL when the Pretrip
Test is completed.

Pretrip Test Conditions


• All zones are forced on.
• Pretrip Test can be run in either Diesel or Electric Mode.
• The unit will autoswitch from Diesel Mode to Electric Mode or from Electric Mode to Diesel Mode
during a Pretrip Test if these features are enabled.

Pretrip Tests are not allowed if:


• Any alarms are present.
• The unit is in Sleep Mode.
• Unit is in Service Test Mode, Interface Board Test Mode or Evacuation Mode.

Pretrip Test Sequence


Pretrip tests proceed in the order shown below. A Full Pretrip Test includes all tests. A Partial Pretrip
Test is started with the engine or motor running and does not include the Amp Checks or Engine Start
Check.
• Amp Checks – Each electrical control component is energized and the current drawn is confirmed as
within specification.
• Engine Start – The Engine will start automatically.
• Zone 1 Defrost – If the Zone 1 coil temperature is below 45°F (7°C), a defrost is cycle is initiated.
• Zone 1 Cool Check – The ability of the unit to cool in low speed is checked.
• RPM Check – The engine RPM in high and low speed is checked during the Zone 1 Cool Check.
• Zone 1 Heat Check - The ability of the unit to heat in low speed is checked.
• Zone 2 Cool Check – The ability of the unit to cool in low speed is checked.
• Zone 2 Heat Check – The ability of the unit to heat in low speed is checked.
• Report Test Results – The test results are reported as PASS, CHECK or FAIL when the Pretrip Test is
completed. If test results are CHECK or FAIL, alarm codes will exist to direct the technician to the
source of the problem.

17 January 2003 4-49


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Performing a Pretrip Test


If a Pretrip Test is initiated with the engine shut down a Full Pretrip Test will be performed. If a Pretrip
Test is initiated with the engine or motor running a Partial Pretrip Test is performed.
Before initiating a Pretrip Test, clear all alarm codes.
To stop a Pretrip Test at any time turn the unit off.
Pretrip Tests are initiated using the Pretrip Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU key.

The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Pretrip
Menu. When the Pretrip Menu is shown press the SELECT key to start a Pretrip Test.

4-50 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Performing a Pretrip Test – (continued)


If the unit is not running a Full Pretrip Test will be initiated. If the unit is running in either diesel or
electric mode a Running Pretrip will be performed.

The Pretrip Test display appears. The top line of the display indicates the unit is performing the
non-running Pretrip Test. Test progress is measured by the number of tests completed out of a total of 26.
In the example below the unit is performing Test 1 of 26, Sensor Check. The soft keys may be used
during the Pretrip Test to select the Hourmeter, Gauge or Sensor menus.

To stop a Pretrip Test at any time turn the unit off. This will generate Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort.
Other alarm codes may also be generated. This is normal when the Pretrip Test is halted before
completion.

17 January 2003 4-51


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Performing a Pretrip Test - (continued)


When the non-running tests are complete the unit will start automatically and continue with the Running
Pretrip Test. In the example shown below the unit is in the Running Pretrip and is performing Test 21 of
26, Zone 1 Cool Test.

When all tests are complete, the results are reported as PASS, CHECK or FAIL. If the results are CHECK
or FAIL, the accompanying alarm codes will direct the technician to the cause of the problem.

If the Pretrip Test results are CHECK or FAIL the problem should be diagnosed and corrected before the
unit is released for service.

4-52 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting Diesel or Electric Operation


The Diesel Electric Display allows the operator to manually select diesel or electric mode operation. The
unit can also be programmed to automatically select electric mode operation when standby power is
available and diesel mode operation if standby power fails or is removed. If the unit is programmed to
switch automatically from diesel to electric and electric to diesel, these screens do not appear.
Factory units are programmed to automatically switch to electric mode when standby power
becomes available. The unit must be switched to diesel power manually.
If the unit has standby power available and is turned on, the electric standby run screen will appear after
the standard screen. The new mode is then confirmed for 10 seconds.

17 January 2003 4-53


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Selecting Diesel or Electric Operation - (continued)


If the unit was switched on in electric and electric standby power is not available, the operator will receive
a prompt to return to Diesel Mode operation. The prompt will appear as shown below.
IMPORTANT: If the unit is switched to Electric Standby Mode and electric standby power is not
available, the operator will receive a prompt to return to Diesel Mode operation. The prompt will
appear as shown below.

To switch back to Diesel mode press the YES key. Pressing the NO key will allow the unit to remain in
Electric Standby mode even though standby power is not available.

4-54 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Display Brightness
The brightness of the HMI Control Panel display can be adjusted to allow for changing ambient light
conditions. The choices available to the operator are HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW and OFF. OFF actually
results in a very dim screen suitable for low light conditions.
Display brightness is adjusted using the Adjust Brightness Menu. From the Standard Display, press the
MENU key.

The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Adjust
Brightness Menu. When the Adjust Brightness Menu is shown press the SELECT key.

17 January 2003 4-55


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Display Brightness - (continued)


The Display Brightness menu will appear as shown below. Press the + or – keys to select the desired
display brightness. When the desired brightness is shown press the YES key to confirm the choice.

The display will briefly show ADJUSTING BRIGHTNESS – PLEASE WAIT

4-56 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Single Temperature Operation


If a single temperature is desired in both zones, turn both zones on and set the same setpoint in both
zones. The compartment bulkheads may be installed or removed. In the example shown below, a single
temperature of 35°F (2°C) has been set for both zones.

17 January 2003 4-57


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Maintenance Menu Overview

4-58 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Maintenance Menu Overview (continued)

17 January 2003 4-59


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Maintenance Menu


The Maintenance Menu contains menus that allow the technician to view additional information, perform
unit diagnostics using Service Test Mode and Interface Board Test Mode and evacuate and charge the unit
with refrigerant using Evacuation Mode. Software revisions can be checked and the time and date can be
set.
To access the Maintenance Menu press the MENU key.

The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Operator Menu screen that appears; either the Language
Display or the Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown here. Press and hold both the unlabeled
soft key and the Exit key for 5 seconds.

4-60 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Maintenance Menu - (continued)


The first Maintenance Menu choice will appear. Press the NEXT and PREVIOUS keys to scroll through
the Maintenance Menu choices. When the desired choice is shown on the display, press the SELECT key
to access it.

The Maintenance Menu choices are shown on the next page. For detailed information see the individual
explanations of each item later in this section of the manual.
To return to the Standard Display press the EXIT key.

17 January 2003 4-61


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Maintenance Menu Choices


Hourmeter Menu: Allows the technician to view all the active unit hourmeters even if the Operator Menu
view has been turned off. The Maintenance Menu Hourmeter Display also allows the technician to reset
the time on hourmeters with a programmed time limit.

Total Unit Hours Total Run Hours Total Engine Hours Total Electric Hours

Total Zone 1 Run Hours Total Zone 2 Run Hours Maint. Total Hours 1 Maint. Total Hours 2

Controller On Hours Maint. Pretrip Hours Maint. Engine Hours 1 Maint. Engine Hours 2

Maint. Electric Hours 1 Maint. Electric Hours 2

Gauges Menu: Allows the technician to view the unit gauges.

Coolant Temp Coolant Level Engine Oil Pressure Amps

Battery Voltage Engine RPM Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure

Compressor Temp

Sensors Menu: Allows the technician to view the unit temperature sensors.

Ambient Temp Zone 1 Return Air Zone 1 Discharge Air Zone 1 Temp Diff

Zone 1 Coil Zone 2 Return Air Zone 2 Discharge Air Zone 2 Temp Diff

Zone 2 Coil Spare 1 Sensor DAS Sensor 1 DAS Sensor 2

DAS Sensor 3 DAS Sensor 4 DAS Sensor 5 DAS Sensor 6

Sensor Calibration Menu: Allows the technician to calibrate the graded unit temperature sensors.

Zone 1 Return Air Zone 1 Discharge Air Zone 2 Return Air Zone 2 Discharge Air

Spare 1 Sensor

Service Test Mode Menu: Allows the technician to force the unit to a known mode in each zone for
diagnostic purposes. The unit can be either running or shut down. Each zone can be set to one of the
modes shown below. Only one zone can be in defrost at a time. Null is only available if another zone is
cooling, heating or defrosting.

High Speed Cool Low Speed Cool High Speed Heat Low Speed Heat

Defrost Running Null

4-62 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Maintenance Menu Choices – (continued)


Interface Board Test Mode Menu: Allows the technician to energize and de-energize outputs to diagnose
control devices. The unit is shut down to use this test.

Preheat Buzzer Run Relay Alternator Excite Relay

High Speed Relay Diesel/Electric Relay Condenser Inlet Sol Liquid Injection Sol

Rcvr Tank Pressure Sol Purge Valve Hot Gas Bypass Sol Zone 1 Fans

Zone 1 Suction Line Sol Zone 1 Liquid Line Sol Zone 1 Hot Gas Sol Zone 2 Fans

Zone 2 Suction Line Sol Zone 2 Liquid Line Sol Zone 2 Hot Gas Sol

Display Self Test Menu: Allows the operator to perform a self test on the unit HMI display panel.

Evacuation Mode Menu: Allows the technician to open all normally closed refrigeration system valves to
evacuate and charge the unit with refrigerant. The technician is prompted to install a battery charger to
guarantee sufficient voltage to keep all valves open during the evacuation and charging process.

Software Revision Menu: Allows the technician to view the software revision for the HMI Control Panel
and Controller.

Time and Date Menu: Allows the technician to view and change the HMI Control Panel clock/calendar.

17 January 2003 4-63


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Hourmeters Menu


Hourmeters are displayed using the Hourmeter Display.
There are two important differences between the Operators Hourmeter Display and the Maintenance
Hourmeter Display.
• All active hourmeters are displayed from the Maintenance Hourmeter Display, even if the hourmeter
view is turned off. This feature is not available from the Operators Hourmeter Display.
• The Maintenance Hourmeter Display provides the technician with a Reset key to reset the time limits
on any programmable hourmeters that are in use. This feature is not available from the Operators
Hourmeter Display.
To access the Maintenance Hourmeter Menu press the MENU key.

The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Operator Menu screen that appears; either the Language
Display or the Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown here. Press and hold both the unlabeled
soft key and the Exit key for 5 seconds.

4-64 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Hourmeters Menu – (continued)


The Maintenance Hourmeter Menu will appear. Press the Select key to choose the hourmeter displays.

Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS key to scroll through the hourmeters. Note that a Reset soft key is
available to reset the programmable hourmeters that feature limits. Pressing the Reset key will reset the
hourmeter to 0.

To return to the Maintenance Menu press the Exit key.

17 January 2003 4-65


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Hourmeters Menu – (continued)


Hourmeter names and definitions are listed below in the order they appear. To return to the Maintenance
Menu from the Maintenance Hourmeter Display, press the EXIT key.
HOURMETER NAMES AND DEFINITIONS

Hourmeter Name Definition

Total Hours Total number of hours the unit has been turned on (protection hours).

Total Run Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in both diesel and electric mode.

Engine Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in diesel mode.

Electric Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in electric mode.

Zone 1 Run Hours Total number of hours that Zone 1 has run in both diesel and electric mode.
Includes running null time.

Zone 2 Run Hours Total number of hours that Zone 2 has run in both diesel and electric mode.
Includes running null time.

Total Maintenance Hours 1 User Programmable – The number of hours before a Total Hours
Maintenance Reminder 1 occurs as determined by hourmeter limit setting.

Total Maintenance Hours 2 User Programmable – The number of hours before a Total Hours
Maintenance Reminder 2 occurs as determined by hourmeter limit setting.

Total Controller Hours Total hours the controller and HMI control panel have been turned on.

Pretrip Reminder Hours User Programmable – The number of hours before a Pretrip Reminder occurs
as determined by hourmeter limit setting.

Engine Maintenance Hours 1 User Programmable – The number of hours before an Engine Hours
Maintenance Reminder 1 occurs as determined by hourmeter limit setting.

Engine Maintenance Hours 2 User Programmable – The number of hours before an Engine Hours
Maintenance Reminder 2 occurs as determined by hourmeter limit setting.

Electric Maintenance Hours 1 User Programmable – The number of hours before an Electric Hours
Maintenance Reminder 1 occurs as determined by hourmeter limit setting.

Electric Maintenance Hours 2 User Programmable – The number of hours before an Electric Hours
Maintenance Reminder 2 occurs as determined by hourmeter limit setting.

4-66 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Gauges Menu


The Gauges Display allows the technician to view unit operating information. Gauge readings are
updated once per second. The Gauges Display is also available from the Pretrip Display and Service Test
Mode Display.
A Lock key is provided to lock a selected gauge on the display. This prevents the display from timing out
in 30 seconds and allows the technician to view the gauge for an extended period of time.
To access the Gauges Menu press the MENU key.

The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Operator Menu screen that appears; either the Language
Display or the Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown here. Press and hold both the unlabeled
soft key and the Exit key for 5 seconds.

17 January 2003 4-67


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Gauges Menu – (continued)


The Maintenance Hourmeter Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Gauges
Menu. When the Gauges Menu is shown press the SELECT key.

Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS key to scroll through the gauges. The coolant level gauge is shown here.

To lock a gauge on the display press the Lock key. In this case, pressing the Lock key will lock the RPM
Gauge on the display.

4-68 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Gauges Menu – (continued)


Gauge names and definitions are listed below in the order they appear. To return to the Maintenance
Menu from the Gauges Display, press the EXIT key.
GAUGE NAMES AND DEFINITIONS
Units will be as selected by programmable features

Gauge Name Definition

Coolant Temperature Temperature of the diesel engine coolant in degrees F or C.

Coolant Level Level of the diesel engine coolant. Reported as OK or LOW.

Oil Pressure Diesel engine oil pressure. Reported as OK or LOW.

Oil Level Diesel engine oil level. Reported as OK or LOW.

Amps Battery current flow in amperes. A negative value indicates a battery


discharge condition exists.

Battery Volts Battery voltage in volts.

RPM Engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM).

Discharge Pressure Compressor discharge pressure in PSI, kPa or BARS.

Suction Pressure Compressor suction pressure in PSI, kPa or BARS. It should be noted that the
suction pressure transducer is located downstream of the throttling valve. As
a result, the suction pressure displayed is compressor suction pressure, not
system suction pressure.

Compressor Temperature Temperature of the compressor as sensed by the compressor temperature


sensor.

17 January 2003 4-69


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Temperature Sensor Menu


The Temperature Sensor Display allows the technician to view the readings of the unit and zone
temperature sensors. Sensor readings are updated once per second. The Temperature Sensors Display is
also available from the Pretrip Display and Service Test Mode Display.
Temperature differential (∆T) is automatically calculated for each zone as an aid for the technician. A
negative temperature differential indicates the zone is cooling and a positive temperature differential
indicates the zone is heating. A Lock key is provided to lock a selected temperature sensor on the display.
This prevents the display from timing out in 30 seconds and allows the technician to view the sensor for
an extended period of time.
To access the Temperature Sensor Menu press the MENU key.

The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Operator Menu screen that appears; either the Language
Display or the Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown here. Press and hold both the unlabeled
soft key and the Exit key for 5 seconds.

4-70 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Temperature Sensor Menu – (continued)


The Maintenance Hourmeter Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Sensors
Menu. When the Sensors Menu is shown press the SELECT key.

Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS key to scroll through the sensors. The return air sensor for Zone 1 is
shown here.

17 January 2003 4-71


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Temperature Sensor Menu – (continued)


Temperature differential (∆T) is automatically calculated for each zone as an aid for the technician. A
negative temperature differential indicates the zone is cooling and a positive temperature differential
indicates the zone is heating.
The temperature differential is displayed after the return and discharge temperatures for each zone. The
display below shows the temperature differential for Zone 1.

To lock a gauge on the display press the Lock key. In this case, pressing the Lock key will lock the Zone
1 Temperature Differential on the display.

4-72 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Temperature Sensor Menu – (continued)


Sensor names and definitions are listed below in the order they appear. To return to the Maintenance
Menu from the Sensors Display, press the EXIT key.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR NAMES AND DEFINITIONS
Temperatures units (F or C) will be as selected by programmable features

Sensor Name Definition

Ambient Temp Sensor Ambient or outside air temperature

Zone 1 Return Air Temp Temperature of the air returning to the Zone 1 evaporator.

Zone 1 Discharge Air Temp Temperature of the air leaving the Zone 1 evaporator.

Zone 1 Temp Differential (Discharge air temperature) minus (return air temperature) for Zone 1.

Zone 1 Coil Temp Temperature of the Zone 1 evaporator coil.

Zone 2 Return Air Temp Temperature of the air returning to the Zone 2 evaporator.

Zone 2 Discharge Air Temp Temperature of the air leaving the Zone 2 evaporator.

Zone 2 Temp Differential (Discharge air temperature) minus (return air temperature) for Zone 2.

Zone 2 Coil Temp Temperature of the Zone 2 evaporator coil.

Spare Temp 1 Temperature measured by the optional Spare Sensor 1 (if installed).

17 January 2003 4-73


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Temperature Sensor Calibration Menu


In order to achieve maximum accuracy the return air and discharge air temperature sensors as well as the
spare temperature sensor are graded sensors. Sensors are graded by the manufacturer with a sensor grade
from 1 to 9. Each sensor is then further graded as low, center or high within each grade range. Sensor
grades are physically stamped on each sensor and range from 1L to 9H. A sensor in the center grade
range is stamped with the grade number only. These grades eliminate the need for sensors to be calibrated
using an ice water bath.
Due to sensor calibration scaling factors Grade 5H sensors do not exist (Grade 5L and 5 do exist).
Therefore, grade 5H is the sensor grade factory default as it indicates the sensor grade has not been set.
Sensor grade settings are checked when unit power switch is turned on. If any return, discharge or spare
air sensor is indicating a valid temperature and is set to Grade 5H then Alarm Code 111 will be set during
a Pretrip Test. This alarm clears automatically when all graded sensors are set to a value other than Grade
5H.
Other unit sensors (coil temperature, ambient temperature, engine coolant temperature and compressor
temperature) are ungraded sensors and need not be calibrated.
IMPORTANT: Any time a graded sensor is replaced the sensor grade of the replacement sensor must
be checked and set.
Only configured zones appear in sensor calibration menu unless a valid sensor reading is detected.
The Temperature Sensor Calibration Display allows the technician to view and change the grade of
return, discharge and spare sensors.

4-74 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Temperature Sensor Calibration Menu – (continued)


To access the Temperature Sensor Calibration Menu press the MENU key.

The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Operator Menu screen that appears; either the Language
Display or the Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown here. Press and hold both the unlabeled
soft key and the Exit key for 5 seconds.

The Maintenance Hourmeter Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Sensor
Calibration Menu. When the Sensor Calibration Menu is shown press the SELECT key.

17 January 2003 4-75


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Temperature Sensor Calibration Menu – (continued)


Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS key to chose the desired sensor. The discharge air sensor for Zone 1 is
shown here. Grade 5H indicates that the sensor has not been set.

When the desired sensor is shown press the SELECT key to chose the sensor. The sensor grade can now
be changed using the - and/or + keys. Here the sensor grade has been changed to 8L.

When the desired sensor grade is shown press the YES key to set the grade.

4-76 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Temperature Sensor Calibration Menu – (continued)


The display will confirm that the grade is being changed as shown below and then the new sensor grade
will appear.

IMPORTANT: For optimum performance the sensor grades for all return air sensors and discharge
air sensors must be properly set. Failure to do so may result in reduced performance and/or nuisance
alarm codes.

17 January 2003 4-77


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Service Test Mode Menu


Since it is impossible to predict exact operating conditions, a diagnostic feature called Service Test Mode
has been incorporated. This feature allows the unit to be "forced" to a known operating state in Diesel
mode, regardless of setpoint or temperature sensor inputs. Service personnel can now troubleshoot the
system under defined conditions. Service Test Mode can be used with the unit running or shut down.
When a Service Test Mode operating state is selected, the unit will operate in that state for 15 minutes. If
no other Service Test Mode state is selected during this time the unit will shut down and generate Alarm
Code 54 Test Mode Timeout. All protection circuits and functions operate normally in Service Test
Mode.
The Service Test Mode display shows operating state, return air temperature, discharge air temperature,
evaporator coil temperature and the calculated value for temperature differential. The Gauge Menu is
also available.
To access the Service Test Mode Menu press the MENU key.

4-78 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Service Test Mode Menu - (continued)


The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Operator Menu screen that appears; either the Language
Display or the Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown here. Press and hold both the unlabeled
soft key and the Exit key for 5 seconds.

The Maintenance Hourmeter Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Service Test
Menu. When the Service Test Menu is shown press the SELECT key.

The display will prompt for running or non-running test as shown below. Yes is chosen here.

17 January 2003 4-79


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Service Test Mode Menu - (continued)


The Service Test Display is shown below. Pressing the NEXT key switches between Zone 1 and Zone 2.
After a test is chosen in one zone the NEXT key is used to choose another zone to start a second test in
that zone. Zone 1 has been chosen below, and the zone is currently turned off as shown by the top line of
the display.

Pressing the TEST key allows the operator to choose the desired test.

The – and/or + keys are used to scroll through the available tests for the selected zone, starting with OFF.
High Speed Cool is shown here. When the desired test is shown press the YES key.

4-80 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Service Test Mode Menu - (continued)


The display will indicate that the change is being programmed.

The new test mode for the zone is then shown. In the example shown here, zone 1 is now running in high
speed cool. Pressing the NEXT key will select Zone 2. Pressing the TEST key allows a test mode to be
chosen for Zone 2.

To return to the Maintenance Menu from the Service Test Mode Display, press the EXIT key.

17 January 2003 4-81


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Service Test Mode Menu - (continued)


Service Test Mode Operating States are listed below in the order they appear. All operating states are
available in all zones with the following considerations:
• A different operating state, from the table below, can be selected for each zone.
• Only one zone at a time may be in defrost.
• A zone may not be in running null unless another zone is running in cool, heat or defrost.
• The Service Test Mode starts with all zones off. Once an operating state has been selected the last
zone still running cannot be turned off. This is normal operation.
• To operate the unit in Reverse Cycle Heat, place one zone in cool and the other zone in heat.
• If no other Service Test Mode state is selected during this time, the unit will shut down and generate
Alarm Code 54 Test Mode Timeout.
• All protection circuits and functions operate normally in Service Test Mode.
• To return to the Maintenance Menu from the Service Test Mode Display, press the EXIT key.

Service Test Mode Operating States and Conditions


See the table on the next page for a list of control devices energized in each operating state.

Operating State Definition

Zone 1 Off Zone 1 is turned off.

Zone 1 High Speed Cool Zone 1 is running in High Speed Cool regardless of temperatures.

Zone 1 Low Speed Cool Zone 1 is running in Low Speed Cool regardless of temperatures.

Zone 1 High Speed Heat Zone 1 is running in High Speed Heat regardless of temperatures.

Zone 1 Low Speed Heat Zone 1 is running in Low Speed Heat regardless of temperatures.

Zone 1 Defrost Zone 1 is running in Defrost regardless of temperatures.

Zone 1 Running Null Zone 1 is in running null, all zone devices off but fans are running.

Zone 2 Off Zone 2 is turned off.

Zone 2 High Speed Cool Zone 2 is running in High Speed Cool regardless of temperatures.

Zone 2 Low Speed Cool Zone 2 is running in Low Speed Cool regardless of temperatures.

Zone 2 High Speed Heat Zone 2 is running in High Speed Heat regardless of temperatures.

Zone 2 Low Speed Heat Zone 2 is running in Low Speed Heat regardless of temperatures.

Zone 2 Defrost Zone 2 is running in Defrost regardless of temperatures.

Zone 2 Running Null Zone 2 is in running null, all zone devices off but fans are running.

4-82 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Service Test Mode Menu - (continued)


Operation of Multi-Temperature Unit Solenoids and Valves
Energized means that the microprocessor and interface board is supplying battery voltage to the device.

Item ID Type Cool Heat Defrost Reverse


Cycle

Condenser Inlet Solenoid CIS NO Energized Energized Energized


(Note 1) (closed) (closed) (closed)

Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid RTPS NC


(Note 2)

Purge Valve PV NC Energized Energized Energized


(Note 1) (open) (open) (open)

Liquid Line Solenoid LLS NC Energized Energized Energized Energized


(open) (open) (open) (open)

Hot Gas Solenoid HGS NC Energized Energized Energized


(open) (open) (open)

Hot Gas Bypass Valve HGB NC Energized


or
(Note 1)
De-energized

Liquid Injection Valve LIV NC Energized


(open)

Discharge Pressure Regulator DPR NC Regulates Regulates Regulates


(Note 3)

Suction Line Solenoid SLS NO Energized


(closed)

Note 1 = Influenced by the pressure transducers


Note 2 = Only energized during Evacuation Mode
Note 3 = Mechanical device

Summary
• When a zone is cooling the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is energized (open).
• When a zone is heating or defrosting the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is energized (open) and the Hot
Gas Solenoid (HGS) is energized (open).
• When a zone is in reverse cycle heat the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is energized (open), the Hot Gas
Solenoid (HGS) is energized (open) and the Suction Line Solenoid (SLS) is energized (closed).
• When any zone is heating or defrosting the discharge pressure regulator is controlling discharge
pressure.

17 January 2003 4-83


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Interface Board Test Mode Menu


Interface Board Test Mode allows individual relays or outputs to be energized. This permits service
personnel to troubleshoot the system under defined conditions. Interface Board Test mode is only
available with the unit shut down. If the unit is running when Interface Board Test is entered the unit will
shut down.
Relays and outputs can all be energized momentarily. In addition, all functions except the Preheat relay
and buzzer can be locked on. If a function is locked on that function will remain energized for 15 minutes
if no other Interface Board Test Mode function is selected. At the end of 15 minutes, if no other function
is selected the unit will shut down and record Alarm Code 54 Test Mode Timeout. All protection circuits
operate normally in Service Test Mode.
The Interface Board Test Mode display also shows suction pressure, discharge pressure, amps and battery
volts.
To access the Interface Board Test Menu press the MENU key.

4-84 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Interface Board Test Mode Menu - (continued)


The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Operator Menu screen that appears; either the Language
Display or the Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown here. Press and hold both the unlabeled
soft key and the Exit key for 5 seconds.

The Maintenance Hourmeter Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Interface
Board Test Menu. When the Interface Board Test Menu is shown press the SELECT key.

The display will indicate that the Interface Board Test Mode is being programmed.

17 January 2003 4-85


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Interface Board Test Mode Menu - (continued)


The Interface Board Test Display is shown below. Pressing the NEXT key scrolls forward through the
available Interface Board Test modes. When the end of the list is reached, pressing the NEXT key will
start over from the beginning of the list.

The Preheat Relay and Buzzer selections can only be energized temporarily by pressing the TEMP ON
key. The Preheat Relay selection is shown below.

4-86 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Interface Board Test Mode Menu - (continued)


All other selections can be either energized temporarily using the TEMP ON key or locked on using the
LOCK ON key. If a selection is locked on it will remain on for 15 minutes or until another function is
selected. If another selection is made the current selection is de-energized. Only one selection can be
energized at a time. If no other selection is made, the selection will be de-energized after 15 minutes and
Alarm Code 54 Test Mode Timeout will be generated.

To return to the Maintenance Menu from the Interface Board Test Mode Display, press the EXIT key.

17 January 2003 4-87


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Interface Board Test Mode Menu – (continued)


• Interface Board Test Mode selections are listed below in the order they appear. All tests are run with
the unit shut down.
• Only one selection can be energized at a time. Making another selection de-energizes the previous
selection.
• If no other Interface Board Test Mode state is selected within 15 minutes, the unit will shut down and
generate Alarm Code 54 Test Mode Timeout.
• To return to the Maintenance Menu from the Interface Board Test Mode Display, press the EXIT key.

Interface Board Test Mode Operating States and Conditions


Selection Definition

Preheat Temporarily energizes the Preheat Relay

Buzzer Temporarily energizes the Buzzer

Run Relay Temporarily energizes or locks on the Run Relay

Alternator Excite Relay Temporarily energizes or locks on the Alternator Excite Relay

High Speed Relay Temporarily energizes or locks on the High Speed Relay

Diesel/Electric Relay Temporarily energizes or locks on the Diesel/Electric Relay

Condenser Inlet Solenoid Temporarily energizes or locks on the Condenser Inlet Solenoid

Scroll/Liquid Injection Valve Temporarily energizes or locks on the Liquid Injection Valve

Receiver Tank Press Solenoid Temporarily energizes or locks on the Receiver Tank Press Solenoid

Purge Valve Temporarily energizes or locks on the Purge Valve

Hot Gas Bypass Valve Temporarily energizes or locks on the Hot Gas Bypass Valve

Zone 1 Fans Temporarily energizes or locks on the Zone 1 Fans

Zone 1 Suction Line Solenoid Temporarily energizes or locks on the Zone 1 Suction Line Solenoid

Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Temporarily energizes or locks on the Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid

Zone 1 Hot Gas Solenoid Temporarily energizes or locks on the Zone 1 Hot Gas Solenoid

Zone 2 Fans Temporarily energizes or locks on the Zone 2 Fans

Zone 2 Suction Line Solenoid Temporarily energizes or locks on the Zone 2 Suction Line Solenoid

Zone 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Temporarily energizes or locks on the Zone 2 Liquid Line Solenoid

Zone 2 Hot Gas Solenoid Temporarily energizes or locks on the Zone 2 Hot Gas Solenoid

4-88 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Display Self Test Menu


The Display Self Test allows the operation of the Control Panel display, keypad, backlight, display
intensity, buzzer and communication ports to be verified.
To access the Display Self Test Menu press the MENU key.

The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Operator Menu screen that appears; either the Language
Display or the Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown here. Press and hold both the unlabeled
soft key and the Exit key for 5 seconds.

17 January 2003 4-89


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Display Self Test Menu – (continued)


The Maintenance Hourmeter Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Display Self
Test Menu. When the Display Self Test Menu is shown press the SELECT key.

The first Display Self Test will appear. Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS key as required to scroll through
the Display Self Test Menu. When the desired Display Self Test Menu is shown press the SELECT key
and follow the prompts for that test.

The Display Self Tests are defined on the next page. When the last test is performed the results will be
display as PASS or FAIL.
To exit the Display Self Test press the EXIT key or turn the unit off.

4-90 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Display Self Test Menu – (continued)


Display Self Test names and definitions are listed below in the order they appear. To return to the
Maintenance Menu from the Display Self Test Display, press the EXIT key.

Display Self Test Names and Definitions

Test Name Definition

LCD Test Selecting this test allows a visual check of the display pixels. When NORMAL
is selected all display pixels are turned off except the ones necessary to
display the text. When INVERT is selected all display pixels are turned on
except the ones necessary to display the text.

Keypad Test Selecting this test allows operation of all the display keys except the On and
Off keys to be verified. The operator is prompted to press each soft key, the
defrost key and the turtle key to confirm operation.

Backlight Test Selecting this test allows backlight operation to be verified. The operator is
prompted to turn the backlight on and off to confirm operation.

Brightness Test Selecting this test allows the display brightness to be verified. The operator is
prompted to change the brightness level to confirm operation.

Buzzer Test Selecting this test allows the HMI buzzer to be verified. The operator is
prompted to turn the buzzer on and off to confirm operation.

Communications Test Selecting this test allows the operation of each serial communications port to
be verified.

Results Display The test results are displayed as PASS or FAIL.

17 January 2003 4-91


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Evacuation Mode Menu


Evacuation Mode opens the system by energizing all normally closed refrigeration valves. This allows
the entire refrigeration system to be evacuated.
Evacuation mode is only used with the unit off. Since a number of refrigeration valves must be energized
for an extended period of time, the operator is prompted to connect a battery charger to the unit battery.
This maintains the unit battery in a charged condition and insures ample voltage to hold all refrigeration
valves in the open position during the evacuation process.
To access the Interface Board Test Menu press the MENU key.

The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Operator Menu screen that appears; either the Language
Display or the Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown here. Press and hold both the unlabeled
soft key and the Exit key for 5 seconds.

4-92 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Evacuation Mode Menu – (continued)


The Maintenance Hourmeter Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Evacuation
Mode Menu. When the Evacuation Mode Menu is shown press the SELECT key.

The display will indicate that the Evacuation Mode is being programmed.

The operator is prompted to connect a battery charger capable of 20 amps to the unit battery. This
maintains the unit battery in a charged condition and insures ample voltage to hold all refrigeration valves
in the open position during the evacuation process.

17 January 2003 4-93


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Evacuation Mode Menu – (continued)


The battery voltage is shown and all normally closed refrigeration valves are opened. They will remain
open until the EXIT key is pressed or the battery voltage falls below a minimum voltage.

Proceed with system evacuation.

4-94 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Software Revision Menu


Software revisions are displayed using the Software Revision Menu.
The following revisions are displayed:
• Controller Software Revision
• HMI Control Panel Software Revision
To access the Software Revision Menu press the MENU key.

The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Operator Menu screen that appears; either the Language
Display or the Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown here. Press and hold both the unlabeled
soft key and the Exit key for 5 seconds.

17 January 2003 4-95


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Software Revision Menu – (continued)


The Maintenance Hourmeter Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Software
Revision Menu. When the Software Revision Menu is shown press the SELECT key.

Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS key to scroll through the software revisions. The controller software
revision is shown here. To return to the Maintenance Menu press the Exit key.

4-96 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Set Time and Date Menu


Unit time and date information is held within the HMI Control Panel. The Set Time and Date Menu is
used to set or change the time and date.
It should be noted that the time display is shown in 24 hour time. For example, 1 pm is displayed as 13xx
and 8 pm is shown as 20xx where xx are the minutes past the hour.
To access the Set Time and Date Menu press the MENU key.

The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Operator Menu screen that appears; either the Language
Display or the Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown here. Press and hold both the unlabeled
soft key and the Exit key for 5 seconds.

17 January 2003 4-97


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Set Time and Date Menu – (continued)


The Maintenance Hourmeter Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Set Time
and Date Menu. When the Time and Date Menu is shown press the SELECT key.

The Enter Hour display will appear. Use the “+” and “-” keys to adjust hours to the desired number and
then press the YES key to confirm. 1300 hours (or 1 pm) is shown here.

Set the minutes, date, month and year in the same manner. After the Year is set and confirmed the display
will briefly show the new time and date.

4-98 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Guarded Access Menu Overview

17 January 2003 4-99


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Guarded Access Menu


The Guarded Access Menu contains menus that allow the technician to check and change the unit’s
programmable features. These features are detailed in Section 3 of this manual. Service Procedure A02A
explains how to read and record the programmable feature settings. Service Procedure A04A explains
how to set the programmable features.
To access the Guarded Access Menu press the MENU key.

The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Operator Menu screen that appears; either the Language
Display or the Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown here. Press and hold both the unlabeled
soft key and the Exit key for 5 seconds.

4-100 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Guarded Access Menu - (continued)


The first Maintenance Menu choice will appear. Press the NEXT key to scroll through all of the
Maintenance Menu choices. When the last choice is shown on the display, the next key will disappear as
shown below.

Press and hold both the unlabeled soft key and the Exit key for 5 seconds.

The Access Code challenge will appear. Enter “1” (or the code used by the customer) and press the YES
key. The first submenu will appear. See the next page for complete details.

17 January 2003 4-101


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Guarded Access Menu - (continued)


See Section 3 of this manual for descriptions of each feature. Service Procedure A02A in Section 6
explains how to read and record the programmable feature settings. Service Procedure A04A in Section 6
explains how to set the programmable features.

Guarded Access Menu Choices


Programmable Features Menu: Allows the technician to set the programmable features shown below.

Temperature Units Pressure Units Restarts are Enabled

Setpoint High Limit Setpoint Low Limit Fuel Saver II is Enabled

High Speed Pull Down Enabled Economy Mode Enabled Economy Mode Visible

Running Fans in Null Door Open Enabled Door Action

High Speed Lockout Enabled Sleep After Pretrip Enabled

Hourmeter Setup Menu: Allows the technician to set the hourmeter operation shown below.
Program Hourmeter Submenu

Total Run Time Reminder # 1 Total Run Time Reminder # 2 Controller Power On Hours

Pretrip Reminder Hours Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 Engine Run Time Reminder # 2

Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 Electric Run Time Reminder 2

Viewable Hourmeter Submenu

Total Hours Viewing Total Run Hours Viewing Controller Power Hours Viewing

Engine Run Time Viewing Electric Run Time Viewing Zone 1 Run Time Viewing

Zone 2 Run Time Viewing

CYCLE-SENTRY Setup Menu: Allows the technician to set the CYCLE-SENTRY features shown below.

CYCLE-SENTRY Amps Battery Sentry Volts

Defrost Setup Menu: Allows the technician to set the Defrost features shown below.

Defrost Interval In Range - Fresh Setpoint Defrost Interval Not In Range - Fresh Setpoint

Defrost Interval In Range - Frozen Setpoint Defrost Interval Not In Range - Frozen Setpoint

Maximum Defrost Duration

4-102 17 January 2003


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

Using the Guarded Access Menu - (continued)


Language Setup Menu: Allows the technician to set the Language features shown below.

Default Language Enable Language English Enable Language Spanish

Enable Language French Enable Language German Enable Language Italian

Access Code Setup Menu: Allows the technician to set the Access Code.

Enter Access Code

Unit Configuration Menu: Allows the technician to set the Unit Configuration features shown below.

Compressor Type Number of ETV’s Electric Standby Equipped

Auto Switch Diesel to Electric Auto Switch Electric to Diesel Number of Zones

17 January 2003 4-103


Section 4 — SPECTRUM Operation

4-104 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

SPECTRUM Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1


SPECTRUM Microprocessor Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Corrective Actions As A Result Of Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Log Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Check Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Prevent Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Shutdown Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Pretrip Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Alarm Codes and Switching Modes from Diesel to Electric or Electric to Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
ALARM CODE Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Alarm Code 00 - No Alarms Exist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Alarm Code 02 - Failed Evaporator Coil Sensor (in Indicated Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Alarm Code 03 - Failed Return Air Sensor (in Indicated Zone). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Alarm Code 04 - Failed Discharge Air Sensor (in Indicated Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Alarm Code 05 - Failed Ambient Air Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Alarm Code 06 - Failed Coolant Temp Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Alarm Code 07 - Failed Engine RPM Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Alarm Code 09 – High Evaporator Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Alarm Code 10 – High Discharge Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Alarm Code 11 – Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor (in Indicated Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Alarm Code 12 – Sensor Shut Down (in Indicated Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Alarm Code 13 – Sensor Check (in Indicated Zone). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Alarm Code 15 – Check Glow Plugs or Intake Air Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Alarm Code 17 – Engine Failed to Crank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Alarm Code 18 - High Engine Coolant Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Alarm Code 19 – Low Engine Oil Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Alarm Code 20 – Engine Failed to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Alarm Code 21 – Cooling Cycle Check (in Indicated Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Alarm Code 22 – Heating Cycle Check (in Indicated Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Alarm Code 23 – Cooling Cycle Fault (in Indicated Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Alarm Code 24 – Heating Cycle Fault (in Indicated Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Alarm Code 25 – Alternator Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Alarm Code 26 – Check Refrigeration Capacity (in Indicated Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Alarm Code 28 – Pretrip Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Alarm Code 31 – Check Oil Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Alarm Code 32 – Refrigeration Capacity Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Alarm Code 33 – Check Engine RPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Alarm Code 35 – Check Run Relay Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Alarm Code 36 – Electric Motor Failed to Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Alarm Code 37 – Check Engine Coolant Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Alarm Code 38 – Electric Phase Reversed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Alarm Code 40 – Check High Speed Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Alarm Code 42 – Unit Forced to Low Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Alarm Code 45 – Check Hot Gas Bypass Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Alarm Code 50 – Reset Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Alarm Code 52 – Check Hot Gas Valve (in Indicated Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Alarm Code 54 – Test Mode Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Alarm Code 61 – Low Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Alarm Code 62 – Ammeter Out of Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 63 – Engine Stopped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41


Alarm Code 64 – Pretrip Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Alarm Code 66 – Low Engine Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Alarm Code 67 – Check Liquid Line Solenoid (in Indicated Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Alarm Code 68 – Internal Controller Fault Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Alarm Code 70 – Hourmeter Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Alarm Code 74 – Controller Reset to Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Alarm Code 79 – Data Log Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Alarm Code 80 – Failed Compressor Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Alarm Code 82 – High Compressor Temperature Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Alarm Code 84 – Restart Null . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Alarm Code 85 – Forced Unit Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Alarm Code 86 – Failed Discharge Pressure Transducer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49
Alarm Code 87 – Failed Suction Pressure Transducer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50
Alarm Code 90 – Electric Overload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
Alarm Code 91 – Check Electric Ready Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52
Alarm Code 92 – Sensor Grade not Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53
Alarm Code 93 – Low Compressor Suction Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53
Alarm Code 106 – Check Purge Valve Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Alarm Code 107 – Check Condenser Inlet Solenoid Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55
Alarm Code 108 – Door Open Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-56
Alarm Code 110 – Check Suction Line Solenoid (in Indicated Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-57
Alarm Code 111 – Unit Not Configured Correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58
Alarm Code 112 – Check Remote Fans (in Indicated Zone). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-59
Alarm Code 114 – Multiple Alarms, Can Not Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-60
Alarm Code 115 – High Pressure Cutout Switch Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-60
Alarm Code 117 – Auto Switched from Diesel To Electric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-61
Alarm Code 118 – Auto Switched from Electric to Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-62
Alarm Code 120 – Check Alternator Excite Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-63
Alarm Code 121 – Check Liquid Injection Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-64
Alarm Code 122 – Check Diesel/Electric Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-65
Alarm Code 127 – Setpoint Not Entered (in Indicated Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-65
Alarm Code 128 – Engine Run Time Maintenance Reminder #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-66
Alarm Code 129 – Engine Run Time Maintenance Reminder #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-66
Alarm Code 130 – Electric Run Time Maintenance Reminder #1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-66
Alarm Code 131 – Electric Run Time Maintenance Reminder #2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-67
Alarm Code 132 – Total Unit Run Time Maintenance Reminder #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-67
Alarm Code 133 – Total Unit Run Time Maintenance Reminder #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-67
Alarm Code 134 – Controller Power On Hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68
Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics
SPECTRUM Diagnostics
Section 5 is devoted to diagnostic routines
designed to help the technician quickly identify
the cause of a problem and repair it using the
correct tools, information and procedures. It is
important that the required procedures be
followed exactly. Failure to do so may result in an
incomplete repair.
The remaining material is divided into two tables.
The first table suggests corrective actions as a
result of alarm codes. The second table suggests
corrective actions as a result of symptoms other
than alarm codes.
The following hints will prove helpful.
• Every effort should be made to perform a
Pretrip Test on a suspect unit. In almost all
cases, the Pretrip Test will result in one or
more alarm codes that will lead you directly to
the problem.
• Operators should record all alarm codes in
sequence for reference. Alarm codes are
displayed in order of occurrence, with the
most recent alarm code displayed first.
• Clear all alarm codes before starting a Pretrip
Test.
• Be certain all connectors on the interface
board are completely seated.
• Be certain all harness connectors are securely
in place.
• Before releasing the unit for service make sure
all programmable features are set to the
customers specifications.

17 January 2003 5-1


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

SPECTRUM Microprocessor Electrostatic Discharge


Notes The following electrostatic precautions must be
The following procedures must be followed when taken.
working on units equipped with SPECTRUM • Keep all SPECTRUM Microprocessors and
microprocessors. SPECTRUM HMI Control Panels in
• Never use testers consisting of a battery and a anti-static bags at all times.
light bulb to test circuits on any • Protect any defective SPECTRUM
microprocessor based device. microprocessors and SPECTRUM HMI
• Any time a Return Air or Discharge Air sensor control panels from physical damage by
is changed, it must be calibrated using the placing them in the shipping carton supplied
Sensor Calibration feature in the Maintenance with the replacement. They will be returned
Menu. for failure analysis and possible
re-manufacture.
• Any time the microprocessor is replaced,
these Service Procedures must be used:
A02A - Recording Existing Microprocessor
Setup
A03A - Microprocessor Removal and
Replacement
A04A - Microprocessor Setup
• Any time welding is necessary, Service
Procedure A26A must be followed.

5-2 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Corrective Actions As A Result Of Alarm Codes


Every effort should be made to perform a Prevent Alarms
Pretrip Test on a unit suspected of having a
Prevent Alarms are indicated by a steady alarm
defect. In almost all cases, the Pretrip Test will
indication at the top of the display and the
result in one or more alarm codes that will lead
message “Unit in Prevent Mode”. The unit will
you directly to the problem.
wait a timed restart interval or until conditions
Alarms may be one of four types as shown below. allow and then restart. If the unit is in a restart
If an alarm applies only to a specific zone, that interval Alarm Code 84 Restart Null will be
zone will be displayed with the alarm code. present along with the Prevent Alarm. In other
cases the unit may restart with reduced
Log Alarms performance to determine if continued operation
is possible. If the alarm does not reoccur with
Log Alarms are indicated at the top of the display
reduced performance the unit will then return to
for 30 seconds each time the unit is turned on.
full performance. If the unit is operating with
The alarm indication will go off after 30 seconds.
reduced performance Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit
This level of alarm serves as a notice to take
Operation will also be present. If the alarm
corrective action before a problem becomes
condition re-occurs a defined number of times the
severe. Maintenance items such as maintenance
alarm is set as a shutdown alarm and no further
hourmeter time-outs are log alarms.
restarts are possible. If an alarm applies only to a
specific zone, that zone will be displayed with the
Check Alarms alarm code.
Check Alarms are indicated by a steady alarm
indication at the top of the display and the Shutdown Alarms
message “Service Required within 24 Hours”.
Shutdown Alarms are indicated by a flashing
This level of alarm serves as a notice to take
alarm display and the message “Unit Not Running
corrective action before a problem becomes
- Service Required”. Shutdown alarms will force
severe. The unit will run with check alarms but
the unit into shutdown. The unit will remain in
some features and functions may be inhibited. If
shutdown until the shutdown alarm is cleared.
an alarm applies only to a specific zone, that zone
Exceptions are some engine and electric shutdown
will be displayed with the alarm code. On a
alarms that become log alarms when switched to
multi-temp application if a zone specific problem
the alternate operating mode (diesel to electric or
is severe the zone will shut down but the alarm is
electric to diesel).
set as a check alarm to allow the other zones to
continue to run. If severe problems occur in all
zones the unit will shut down.

17 January 2003 5-3


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Special Considerations
Pretrip Alarm Codes
If an alarm occurs during a Pretrip Test the alarm
code will be displayed as Pretrip Alarm XX,
where XX is the alarm code.

Alarm Codes and Switching Modes from


Diesel to Electric or Electric to Diesel
If a shutdown alarm occurs that affects only diesel
mode operation and the unit is switched to
electric, the diesel mode shutdown alarm becomes
an electric mode log alarm. This allows the unit
to run in electric mode without clearing the
shutdown alarm that is preventing diesel mode
operation. If the unit is switched back to diesel
mode, the alarm again become a diesel mode
shutdown alarm and prevents unit operation.
In the same manner, if a shutdown alarm occurs
that affects only electric mode operation and the
unit is switched to diesel, the electric mode
shutdown alarm becomes a diesel mode log alarm
to allow diesel mode operation. If the unit is
switched back to electric mode, the alarm reverts
to an electric mode shutdown alarm and prevents
unit operation.

5-4 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

ALARM CODE Diagnostics


Alarm Code 00 - No Alarms Exist
Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

00 No alarms exist None

Alarm Code 02 - Failed Evaporator Coil Sensor (in Indicated Zone)


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

02 Failed Evaporator Coil Sensor (in Operator Help


Indicated Zone). This is a log or 1. Manually monitor load temperature. Report this alarm at
shutdown alarm. end of the day.

A problem exists with the sensor or Technical Help


its wiring. The sensor is located on 1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the

the evaporator coil header plate. display shows [----], the sensor is defective or the circuit is

The wiring is part of the Evaporator open or shorted.

Zone Harness and Controller


Harness and is connected to the 2. Check the sensor Deutsch connector for a pushed pin or

microprocessor at the 35 pin missing orange pin lock, loose pin crimp or broken wire.

microprocessor connector. Consult


the unit wiring diagrams for 3. Check the sensor using Service Procedure D01A.

complete information.
4. Check the appropriate CTPx and CTNx pins on the 35 pin

NOTE: If all the Sensor Codes microprocessor connector for a pushed pin or loose pin

(02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11 and 12) are crimp or broken wire.

present, the microprocessor may


be defective or a problem may 5. Check the appropriate sensor harness wires with an

exist with the 35 pin sensor ohmmeter per Service Procedure H04A.

connector at the microprocessor.


6. Check the control system using Service Procedure A01A.

7. Moisture in the Deutsch connector or moisture entering the


sensor through the sensor leads can cause intermittent
operation.

17 January 2003 5-5


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 03 - Failed Return Air Sensor (in Indicated Zone)


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

03 Failed Return Air Sensor (in Operator Help


Indicated Zone). This is a log or 1. Manually monitor load temperature. Report this alarm at
shutdown alarm. end of the day.

A problem exists with the sensor or Technical Help


its wiring. The sensor is located on 1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the

the evaporator blower inlet. The display shows [----], the sensor is defective or the circuit is

wiring is part of the Evaporator open or shorted.

Zone Harness and Controller


Harness and is connected to the 2. Check the sensor Deutsch connector for a pushed pin or

microprocessor at the 35 pin missing orange pin lock, loose pin crimp or broken wire.

microprocessor connector. Consult


the unit wiring diagrams for 3. Check the sensor using Service Procedure D01A.

complete information.
4. Check the appropriate RTPx and RTNx pins on the 35 pin

NOTE: If all the Sensor Codes microprocessor connector for a pushed pin or loose pin

(02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11 and 12) are crimp or broken wire.

present, the microprocessor may


be defective or a problem may 5. Check the appropriate sensor harness wires with an

exist with the 35 pin sensor ohmmeter per Service Procedure H04A.

connector at the microprocessor.


6. Check the control system using Service Procedure A01A.

CAUTION: If the sensor is


replaced, the temperature sensor 7. Moisture in the Deutsch connector or moisture entering the

grade must be re-calibrated sensor through the sensor leads can cause intermittent

using Service Procedure A15A. operation.

5-6 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 04 - Failed Discharge Air Sensor (in Indicated Zone)


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

04 Failed Discharge Air Sensor (in Operator Help


Indicated Zone). This is a log or 1. Manually monitor load temperature. Report this alarm at
shutdown alarm. end of the day.

A problem exists with the sensor or Technical Help


its wiring. The sensor is located on 1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the

the evaporator discharge grill. The display shows [----], the sensor is defective or the circuit is

wiring is part of the Evaporator open or shorted.

Zone Harness and Controller


Harness and is connected to the 2. Check the sensor Deutsch connector for a pushed pin or

microprocessor at the 35 pin missing orange pin lock, loose pin crimp or broken wire.

microprocessor connector. Consult


the unit wiring diagrams for 3. Check the sensor using Service Procedure D01A.

complete information.
4. Check the appropriate DTPx and DTNx pins on the 35 pin

NOTE: If all the Sensor Codes microprocessor connector for a pushed pin or loose pin

(02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11 and 12) are crimp or broken wire.

present, the microprocessor may


be defective or a problem may 5. Check the appropriate sensor harness wires with an

exist with the 35 pin sensor ohmmeter per Service Procedure H04A.

connector at the microprocessor.


6. Check the control system using Service Procedure A01A.

CAUTION: If the sensor is


replaced, the temperature sensor 7. Moisture in the Deutsch connector or moisture entering the

grade must be re-calibrated sensor through the sensor leads can cause intermittent

using Service Procedure A15A. operation.

17 January 2003 5-7


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 05 - Failed Ambient Air Sensor


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

05 Failed Ambient Air Sensor. This is Operator Help


a log or shutdown alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

A problem exists with the sensor or Technical Help


its wiring. The sensor is located 1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the

behind the condenser grill. The display shows [----], the sensor is defective or the circuit is

wiring is part of the Controller open or shorted.

Harness and is connected to the


microprocessor at the 35 pin 2. Check the sensor Deutsch connector for a pushed pin or

microprocessor connector. Consult missing orange pin lock, loose pin crimp or broken wire.

the unit wiring diagrams for


complete information. 3. Check the sensor using Service Procedure D01A.

NOTE: If all the Sensor Codes 4. Check the appropriate ATPx and ATNx pins on the 35 pin

(02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11 and 12) are microprocessor connector for a pushed pin or loose pin

present, the microprocessor may crimp or broken wire.

be defective or a problem may


exist with the 35 pin sensor 5. Check the appropriate sensor harness wires with an

connector at the microprocessor. ohmmeter per Service Procedure H04A.

6. Check the control system using Service Procedure A01A.

7. Moisture in the Deutsch connector or moisture entering the


sensor through the sensor leads can cause intermittent
operation.

5-8 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 06 - Failed Coolant Temp Sensor


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

06 Failed Coolant Temp Sensor. This Operator Help


is a log alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

A problem exists with the sensor or Technical Help


its wiring. The sensor is located in 1. Display the sensor reading using the Gauges Menu. If the
the engine thermostat housing. The display shows [----], the sensor is defective or the circuit is
wiring is part of the Controller open or shorted.
Harness and is connected to the
microprocessor at the 35 pin 2. Check the sensor Deutsch connector for a pushed pin or
microprocessor connector. Consult missing orange pin lock, loose pin crimp or broken wire.
the unit wiring diagrams for
complete information. 3. Check the sensor using Service Procedure D01A.

NOTE: If all the Sensor Codes 4. Check the appropriate WTPx and WTNx pins on the 35 pin
(02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11 and 12) are microprocessor connector for a pushed pin or loose pin
present, the microprocessor may crimp or broken wire.
be defective or a problem may
exist with the 35 pin sensor 5. Check the appropriate sensor harness wires with an
connector at the microprocessor. ohmmeter per Service Procedure H04A.

6. Check the control system using Service Procedure A01A.

7. Moisture in the Deutsch connector or moisture entering the


sensor through the sensor leads can cause intermittent
operation.

17 January 2003 5-9


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 07 - Failed Engine RPM Sensor


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

07 Failed Engine RPM Sensor. This Operator Help


is a log alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

A problem exists with the sensor, its Technical Help


wiring or its adjustment. The sensor 1. Display the sensor reading using the Gauges Menu. If the

is located on the flywheel housing display shows [----], the sensor is defective or the circuit is

opposite the starter. The wiring is open or shorted.

part of the Interface Harness and is


connected to the microprocessor 2. Check pins 25 and 26 on the P14 36 pin interface board

through the Interface Board. connector (RPM+ and RPM- wires) for a pushed pin or

Consult the unit wiring diagrams for loose pin crimp or broken wire.

complete information.
3. Check the harness wires RPM+ and RPM- with an
ohmmeter per Service Procedure H04A.

4. Check the control system using Service Procedure A01A.

5-10 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 09 – High Evaporator Temperature


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

09 High Evaporator Temperature. Operator Help


This is a prevent alarm. 1. Manually monitor load temperature. Report this alarm at
end of the day.
Evaporator coil temperature as
sensed by the evaporator coil Technical Help
sensor, return air sensor and/or 1. Check for Alarm Code 02, 03 and 04. Verify that the

discharge air sensor is excessively sensors are reading properly.

high. See Alarm Code 02 for


location of sensor and wiring. 2. Check evaporator fans for proper operation.

3. Check for blocked or dirty evaporator coil.

4. Check for proper operation in heat and defrost mode.

17 January 2003 5-11


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 10 – High Discharge Pressure


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

10 High Discharge Pressure. This is Operator Help


a prevent or shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down on this alarm code and the display is
flashing repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at
The discharge pressure is end of the day.
excessive as sensed by the high
pressure cutout switch HPCO. The Technical Help
high pressure cutout switch is 1. Check for blocked or dirty condenser coil.

located on the discharge line near


the compressor. The wiring is part 2. Check refrigeration system for high discharge pressure.

of the Interface Harness and is


connected to the microprocessor 3. Check the Deutsch connector at the high pressure cutout

through the Interface Board. switch HPCO for a pushed pin or missing orange pin lock,

Consult the unit wiring diagrams for loose pin crimp or broken wire.

complete information.
4. Check for a defective high pressure cutout switch HPCO.
Switch should be normally closed – opens under excessive
discharge pressure.

5. Check pins 18 and 23 on the 36 pin interface board


connector for a pushed pin, loose pin crimp or broken wire.

5-12 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 11 – Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor (in Indicated Zone)


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Operator Help


Sensor (in Indicated Zone).
1. Manually monitor load temperature. Report this alarm at
The primary control sensor has
end of the day.
failed and the unit is controlling
using the alternate sensor. See
Technical Help
Alarm Codes 03 and/or 04 above. 1. Check the Return Air Sensor and/or Discharge Air Sensor
This is a log alarm.
as shown under Alarm Codes 03 and 04 above.

NOTE: If all the Sensor Codes


2. If all sensors read [----], the microprocessor may be
(02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11 and 12) are defective.
present, the microprocessor may
be defective or a problem may
exist with the 35 pin sensor
connector at the microprocessor.

17 January 2003 5-13


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 12 – Sensor Shut Down (in Indicated Zone)


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

12 Sensor Shut Down (in Indicated Operator Help


Zone). This is a check alarm on 1. The indicated zone is no longer able to operate and has
multi-temp units. been shut down. Repair immediately.

A critical problem exists with a Technical Help


combination of the Return Air and 1. Check the Return Air Sensor and Discharge Air Sensors as

Discharge Air Sensors. See Alarm shown under Alarm Codes 03 and 04 above.

Codes 03 and 04 above. After


Alarm Code 03 and/or 04 is 2. If all sensors read [----], the microprocessor may be

repaired, Alarm Code 12 can be defective.

cleared.

NOTE: If all the Sensor Codes


(02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11 and 12) are
present, the microprocessor may
be defective or a problem may
exist with the 35 pin sensor
connector at the microprocessor.

5-14 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 13 – Sensor Check (in Indicated Zone)


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

13 Sensor Check (in Indicated Operator Help


Zone). This is a log alarm. 1. Manually monitor load temperature. Report this alarm at
end of the day.
A critical problem exists with a
combination of the Return Air, Technical Help
Discharge Air and/or Coil Sensors. 1. Check the Return Air Sensor and Discharge Air Sensors as

See Alarm Codes 02, 03 and 04 shown under Alarm Codes 03 and 04 above.

above. After Alarm Code 02, 03


and/or 04 is repaired, Alarm Code 2. If all sensors read [----], the microprocessor may be

13 can be cleared. defective.

17 January 2003 5-15


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 15 – Check Glow Plugs or Intake Air Heater


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

15 Check Glow Plugs. This is a log, Operator Help


check or shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
The glow plugs are drawing too the day.
much or too little current. The glow
plug current is checked during Technical Help
Pretrip Tests and whenever the 1. Check the current draw on the glow plugs using the Gauge

engine is started automatically by Menu while pre-heating. The current should be from 26 to

the microprocessor. The Preheat 32 amps.

Relay is located on the interface


board and the wiring is located in 2. Check fuse F6 on the interface board.

the High Current Harness via the H


circuit. Consult the unit wiring 3. Check the operation of the Preheat Relay K9 using

diagrams for complete information. Interface Board Test Mode in the Maintenance Menu. See
Section 4 for details.

4. Check the voltage at the glow plugs. If the voltage is low


check the glow plug H circuit for excessive resistance

5. Check the H circuit pin on the P21 8 pin interface board


connector for a pushed pin, loose pin crimp or broken wire.

6. Check the glow plugs for continuity to be sure no plugs are


open or shorted. A good plug should measure from 1 to 2
ohms.

7. Check battery volts when the glow plugs are energized.


The voltage should be greater than 11.2 volts. If not, check
the battery and charging circuits.

8. Check the High Current Harness H wire with an ohmmeter


for continuity per Service Procedure H04A.

5-16 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 17 – Engine Failed to Crank


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

17 Engine Failed to Crank. This is a Operator Help


log or shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
An engine start was attempted but the day.
the engine did not crank. The
Starter Relay, LED and fuse are Technical Help
located on the Interface Board. The 1. Check the battery, battery cables and starter.

wiring is located in the High Current


Harness via the 8S circuit. Consult 2. Be sure the Starter Relay fuse F2 is not blown.

the unit wiring diagrams for


complete information. 3. Check the operation of the Starter Relay K3 using Interface
Board Test Mode in the Maintenance Menu. The relay and
LED are located on the Interface Board.

4. Check the 8S pin on the P21 8 pin interface board


connector for a pushed pin, loose pin crimp or broken wire.

5. Check the High Current Harness 8S wire with an ohmmeter


for continuity per Service Procedure H04A.

17 January 2003 5-17


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 18 - High Engine Coolant Temperature


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

18 High Engine Coolant Operator Help


Temperature. This is a prevent or 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
shutdown alarm. repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
the day.
The engine coolant temperature is
excessively high as determined by Technical Help
the Coolant Temperature Sensor. 1. Check the engine water temperature using the Gauge

The wiring is part of the Controller Menu. If the temperature is above 220°F (104°C) check the

Harness and is connected to the engine cooling system to determine the cause of

microprocessor at the 35 pin overheating.

microprocessor connector. Consult


the unit wiring diagrams for 2. Check the engine coolant level. Bleed air from the cooling

complete information. system if necessary.

CAUTION: Do not open radiator when hot.

3. Check the water pump drive belt.

4. Check the radiator for restrictions.

5. Check the Water Temperature Sensor as shown under


Alarm Code 06 above.

5-18 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 19 – Low Engine Oil Pressure

Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

19 Low Engine Oil Pressure. This is Operator Help


a log or shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
The engine oil pressure is low as the day.
determined by the Oil Pressure
Switch. The wiring is part of the Technical Help
Interface Harness. Consult the unit 1. Check engine oil level.

wiring diagrams for complete


information. 2. Verify engine oil pressure using an independent oil
pressure gauge connected at the oil pressure switch block.

3. Check for Alarm Code 31 as related alarm.

Alarm Code 20 – Engine Failed to Start


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

20 Engine Failed to Start. This is a Operator Help


log, check or shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
An engine start was attempted and the day.
the engine cranked but did not start.
Technical Help
1. Check the unit fuel level.

2. Check fuel solenoid, fuel pump and fuel system.

3. Check for cause of slow start or no start of the engine.

17 January 2003 5-19


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 21 – Cooling Cycle Check (in Indicated Zone)


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

21 Cooling Cycle Check (in Operator Help


Indicated Zone). This is a check 1. Manually monitor load temperature. Report this alarm at
alarm. end of the day and repair as required.

Over a period of time the unit Technical Help


should have been cooling but was 1. Check refrigerant level.

not cooling or was actually heating.


2. Attach gauges and evaluate unit refrigeration system
performance.

3. Consult Section 8 for additional refrigeration system


information and Service Procedures.

4. Verify that zone temperature sensors are in the correct


locations.

5. Verify that zone sensor grades are set correctly.

6. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling caused by a


blocked air flow path or a loose bulkhead may generate this
code.

5-20 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 22 – Heating Cycle Check (in Indicated Zone)


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

22 Heating Cycle Check (in Operator Help


Indicated Zone). This is a check 1. Manually monitor load temperature. Report this alarm at
alarm. end of the day.

Over a period of time the unit Technical Help


should have been heating but was 1. Check refrigerant level.

not heating or was actually cooling.


2. Attach gauges and evaluate unit refrigeration system
performance.

3. Consult Section 8 for additional refrigeration system


information and Service Procedures.

4. Verify that zone temperature sensors are in the correct


locations.

5. Verify that zone sensor grades are set correctly.

6. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling caused by a


blocked air flow path or a loose bulkhead may generate this
code.

17 January 2003 5-21


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 23 – Cooling Cycle Fault (in Indicated Zone)


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

23 Cooling Cycle Fault (in Indicated Operator Help


Zone). On multi-temp units this is a 1. The indicated zone is no longer able to operate and has
zone check alarm that has shut the been shut down. Repair immediately.
zone down.
Technical Help
Over an extended period of time the 1. Check refrigerant level.

unit should have been cooling but


was not cooling or was actually 2. Attach gauges and evaluate unit refrigeration system

heating. Corrective actions taken by performance.

the microprocessor have not been


effective and the zone has been 3. Consult Section 8 for additional refrigeration system

shut down. information and Service Procedures.

4. Verify that zone temperature sensors are in the correct


locations.

5. Verify that zone sensor grades are set correctly.

6. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling caused by a


blocked air flow path or a loose bulkhead may generate this
code.

5-22 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 24 – Heating Cycle Fault (in Indicated Zone)


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

24 Heating Cycle Fault (in Indicated Operator Help


Zone). On multi-temp units this is a 1. The indicated zone is no longer able to operate and has
zone check alarm that has shut the been shut down. Repair immediately.
zone down.
Technical Help
Over an extended period of time the 1. Check refrigerant level.

unit should have been heating but


was not heating or was actually 2. Attach gauges and evaluate unit refrigeration system

cooling. Corrective actions taken by performance.

the microprocessor have not been


effective and the zone has been 3. Consult Section 8 for additional refrigeration system

shut down. information and Service Procedures.

4. Verify that zone temperature sensors are in the correct


locations.

5. Verify that zone sensor grades are set correctly.

6. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling caused by a


blocked air flow path or a loose bulkhead may generate this
code.

17 January 2003 5-23


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 25 – Alternator Check


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

25 Alternator Check. This is a log, Operator Help


check or shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
The battery charging system is not the day.
functioning properly. The wiring is
part of the Interface Harness. Technical Help
Consult the unit wiring diagrams for 1. Check the alternator/compressor drive belt.

complete information.
2. Start the engine and check the battery voltage and
amperage using the Gauge Display in the Maintenance
Menu. The voltage should be greater than 13.2 volts but
less than 16 volts. Current flow should be greater than –1.0
amps. Test and repair charging system as required.

3. Check the alternator connections.

4. Check the excitation voltage at the alternator. Excitation


voltage should be equal to the battery voltage.

5. Check the sense voltage at the alternator. Sense voltage


should be equal to the battery voltage.

6. Check fuse F8 on the Interface Board.

7. Check the operation of the Excitation Relay K1 using


Interface Board Test Mode in the Maintenance Menu. The
relay and LED are located on the Interface Board. See
Section 4 for details.

8. If the unit is connected to the truck battery, check the truck


system for proper operation and added options such as
electric lift gates.

5-24 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 26 – Check Refrigeration Capacity (in Indicated Zone)


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

26 Check Refrigeration Capacity (in Operator Help


Indicated Zone). This is a zone 1. Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of
check alarm. the day.

The unit’s cooling or heating Technical Help


performance is impaired. This is 1. Check refrigerant level.

determined during normal unit


operation by comparing ambient 2. Attach gauges and evaluate unit refrigeration system

temperature, return air temperature performance.

and discharge air temperature.


3. Consult Section 8 for additional refrigeration system
information and Service Procedures.

4. Verify that zone temperature sensors are in the correct


locations.

5. Verify that zone sensor grades are set correctly.

6. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling caused by a


blocked air flow path or a loose bulkhead may generate this
code.

17 January 2003 5-25


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 28 – Pretrip Abort


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

28 Pretrip Abort. This is a shutdown Operator Help


alarm. 1. Report alarm at end of the day.

A shutdown alarm occurred during a Technical Help


Pretrip Test. Alarm codes identifying 1. This is a normal alarm any time the Pretrip Test is halted

the problem will be displayed as well and does not finish with a PASS, CHECK or FAIL screen

as Alarm Code 28. This alarm also display.

occurs any time the Pretrip Test is


halted before it is complete. It will 2. Proceed with corrective actions for any alarm codes that

occur if a zone or the unit is turned occurred.

off during the test or if the test is


interrupted by a communications 3. After repairs, repeat the Pretrip Test from the Operators

request. Menu. See Section 4 for details.

4. If only a 28 code appears, the unit or zone may have been


turned off during a Pretrip Test or the test may have been
interrupted by a communications request. Clear the alarm
and repeat the Pretrip Test.

5-26 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 31 – Check Oil Pressure Switch


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

31 Check Oil Pressure Switch. This is Operator Help


a log or shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
The oil pressure switch is not the day.
functioning properly. The oil
pressure switch should be closed Technical Help
when the engine is not running and 1. Display the oil pressure when the unit is not running using

open when the engine is running. the Gauge menu. The oil pressure should show [LOW]. If
not, the switch may be stuck open or the switch circuit may
be open.

2. Display the oil pressure when the unit is running using the
Gauge menu. The oil pressure should be [OK]. If not, the
switch may be stuck closed or the switch circuit may be
shorted.

3. Connect an oil pressure gauge and confirm that oil


pressure is present when the unit is running.

4. Check pin 6 on the 36 pin interface board connector


(20B-01 wire) for a pushed pin or loose pin crimp or broken
wire.

5. Check the 20B-01 wires in the Interface Harness with an


ohmmeter for continuity per Service Procedure H04A.

6. Check the voltage on the 20B-01 wire at pin 6 of the 36 pin


interface board connector P14. Battery volts should be
present when the engine is running.

17 January 2003 5-27


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 32 – Refrigeration Capacity Shutdown


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

32 Refrigeration Capacity Shutdown. Operator Help


On multi-temp units this is a check 1. The indicated zone is no longer able to operate and has
alarm that has shut the zone down. been shut down. Repair immediately.

The unit’s cooling or heating Technical Help


performance is considerably 1. Check refrigerant level.

impaired and corrective actions


such as defrost have failed to 2. Attach gauges and evaluate unit refrigeration system

improve performance and the zone performance.

has been shut down. This is


determined during normal unit 3. Consult Section 8 for additional refrigeration system

operation by comparing ambient information and Service Procedures.

temperature, return air temperature


and discharge air temperature. 4. Verify that zone temperature sensors are in the correct
locations.

5. Verify that zone sensor grades are set correctly.

6. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling caused by a


blocked air flow path or a loose bulkhead may generate this
code.

5-28 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 33 – Check Engine RPM


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

33 Check Engine RPM. This is a Operator Help


check alarm that occurs only during 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.
a Pretrip Test.
Technical Help
The engine speed is out of range in 1. Check and adjust high speed to 2425 ± 25 RPM.

either low speed or high speed


operation. 2. Check and adjust the low speed to 1800 ± 25 RPM.

3. Check for a binding solenoid or disconnected linkage.

Hint: Use Service Test Mode to run the unit in high speed
cool and low speed cool. See Section 4 for details.

17 January 2003 5-29


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 35 – Check Run Relay Circuit


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

35 Check Run Relay Circuit. This is a Operator Help


shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately.
The Run Relay did not function
properly. The Run Relay, LED and Technical Help – All Units
fuse are located on the Interface 1. Check fuse F11 on the Interface Board.

Board. The wiring is located in the


Interface Harness via the 8H wire. 2. Check to be sure the K7 Run Relay LED is energized.

3. Check pin 18 on the 36 pin interface board connector


(8H-01 wire) for a pushed pin or loose pin crimp or broken
wire.

4. Check to be sure the High Pressure Cutout Switch is closed


(8H-01 and HPCO-01 circuit).

5. Check the voltage of the HPCO-01 wire at the HPCO


switch. Battery volts should be present when the unit is
turned on.

6. Check pin 23 on the 36 pin interface board connector


(HPCO-01 wire) for a pushed pin or loose pin crimp or
broken wire.

5-30 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 36 – Electric Motor Failed to Run


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

36 Electric Motor Failed to Run. This Operator Help


is a log, check or shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
The motor failed to operate or the the day.
drive belt is loose and slipping. The
wiring is located in the 50 Harness. Technical Help
The electric standby circuits are 1. Check the motor, motor contactor, overload relay and other

connected to the interface board at associated motor circuitry. The internal pull coil/hold coil

connector P16. circuits in the contactor may be defective requiring


replacement of contactor.

NOTE: Be sure the supply mains


are energized and that all phases 2. Check the voltages at the phase detect module. Battery

are present. voltage should be present on the 7EH-01 wire and the
8F-01 wire.

3. Check the standby power voltage at the phase detect


module. Standby power should be available at L1, L2 and
L3.

4. Check the voltage at the motor contactor coils. Battery


voltage should be present on either the 7EC or 7EB wire
when the motor should be running.

5. Check for reason that the motor fails to turn the alternator,
such as slipping belts, clutch, etc.

6. Check the alternator as shown under Code 25. Pay


particular attention to the AC signal on the W circuit. From
0.5 to 13.0 volts AC should be present on the W circuit
when the alternator is operating.

17 January 2003 5-31


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 37 – Check Engine Coolant Level


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

37 Check Engine Coolant Level. This Operator Help


is a log alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

The engine water level is low. The Technical Help


sensor is located on the side of the 1. Check the engine coolant level and mixture.

radiator tank a few inches below the


filler cap. The coolant level must be CAUTION: Exercise extreme care when checking coolant.

at or above the sensor location. If Be sure coolant is above sensor when the coolant is cold.

the sensor is not submerged in


coolant this alarm will be generated 2. Check the sensor Deutsch connector for a pushed pin or

after the condition exists for 3 missing orange pin lock, loose pin crimp or broken wire.

minutes. The alarm self clears


automatically if the coolant level 3. Check that +5 Vdc is present between the red sensor wire

rises above the sensor location for from the microprocessor (CLSP-02) and the black wire

30 seconds. (CHC-01). Check pin 23 on the 35 pin microprocessor


connector (CLSP-01 wire) for a pushed pin or loose pin

The wiring is located in the Interface crimp or broken wire.

Harness via the CLS-01, CHC-01,


CLSP-02 circuits. 4. Check continuity to ground of the black sensor wire
(CHC-01).

5. Check the voltage between the white sensor wire (CLS-01)


and the black wire (CHC-01). Voltage should be +5 Vdc
when the sensor is submerged in coolant and less than
+0.5 Vdc when the sensor is not submerged. Check pin 28
on the 36 pin interface board connector (CLS-01 wire) for a
pushed pin or loose pin crimp or broken wire.

5-32 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 38 – Electric Phase Reversed


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

38 Electric Phase Reversed. This is a Operator Help


log or shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
Two phases are reversed on 3 the day.
phase standby power or the motor is
mis-wired, causing the compressor Technical Help
and condenser fan to rotate in the 1. Check motor wiring to be sure phase rotation is correct.

wrong direction.
2. Confirm that the 7EC-01 wire is connected to the MCB
motor contactor and the 7EB-01 wire is connected to the
MCA motor contactor.

3. Check the voltages at the phase detect module. Battery


voltage should be present on the 7EH-01 wire and the
8F-01 wire.

4. Check the standby power voltage at the phase detect


module. Standby power should be available at L1, L2 and
L3.

5. Confirm that the phase wiring between contactor MCA and


MCB is correct.

17 January 2003 5-33


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 40 – Check High Speed Circuit


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

40 Check High Speed Circuit. This is Operator Help


a check or shutdown alarm that only 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
occurs during a Pretrip Test. repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
the day.
A problem exists with the throttle
relay, throttle solenoid or the Technical Help
associated circuitry. The K5 Throttle 1. Check interface board fuse F18.

Relay, LED and fuse F18 are


located on the Interface Board. The 2. Check the operation of the throttle solenoid using Interface

wiring is located in the High Current Board Test Mode in the Maintenance Menu. See Section 4

Harness via the 7D-01 circuit. for details.

3. With the throttle solenoid energized using Interface Board


Test Mode check the current flow using the Gauge Menu.
Current should be from 1-10 amps.

4. With the throttle solenoid energized using Interface Board


Test Mode check for 12 volts across the throttle solenoid.

5. Check the throttle solenoid with an ohmmeter for continuity.

6. Check the High Current Harness wire 7D with an ohmmeter


for continuity per Service Procedure H04A.

5-34 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 42 – Unit Forced to Low Speed


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

42 Unit forced to Low Speed. This is Operator Help


a prevent alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

The unit has been forced to low Technical Help


speed operation due to high 1. Proceed as directed by Alarm Code 10 or Alarm Code 18.

discharge pressure or high engine


coolant temperature. This code will
appear with Alarm Code 10 or Alarm
Code 18. This is a check alarm that
clears automatically when discharge
pressure or coolant temperature
returns to normal for a period of
time.

17 January 2003 5-35


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 45 – Check Hot Gas Bypass Circuit


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

45 Check Hot Gas Bypass Circuit. Operator Help


This is a check or shutdown alarm 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
that only occurs during a Pretrip repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
Test. the day.

A problem exists with the hot gas Technical Help


bypass output, hot gas bypass valve 1. Check interface board fuse F20.

or the associated circuitry. The hot


gas bypass LED and fuse F20 are 2. Check the operation of the hot gas bypass valve using

located on the Interface Board. The Interface Board Test Mode in the Maintenance Menu. See

wiring is located in the Interface Section 4 for details.

Harness via the HGBP-01 and


HGBN-01 circuits. 3. With the hot gas bypass valve energized using Interface
Board Test Mode check the current flow using the Gauge
Menu. Current should be from 0.5 – 3.0 amps.

4. With the hot gas bypass valve energized using Interface


Board Test Mode check for 12 volts across the hot gas
bypass valve connector.

5. Check the hot gas bypass valve coil with an ohmmeter for
continuity.

6. Check the Interface Harness wires HGBP-01 and HGBN-01


with an ohmmeter for continuity per Service Procedure
H04A.

5-36 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 50 – Reset Clock


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

50 Reset Clock. This is a log alarm. Operator Help


1. Report this alarm at end of the day.
The unit clock may no longer be
accurate. Technical Help
1. Reset clock as required. Consult customer for desired time
zone.

17 January 2003 5-37


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 52 – Check Hot Gas Valve (in Indicated Zone)


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

52 Check Hot Gas Valve Circuit (in Operator Help


Indicated Zone). This is a check or 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
shutdown alarm that only occurs repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
during a Pretrip Test. the day.

On multi-temp units a hot gas Technical Help


solenoid is located in the remote 1. Check interface board fuse F7 (Zone 1) or multi-temp

evaporator for each zone. The option board fuse F200 (Zone 2).

affected zone will be identified along


with this alarm code. 2. Check the operation of the hot gas valve in the appropriate
zone using Interface Board Test Mode in the Maintenance

A problem exists with the hot gas Menu. See Section 4 for details.

relay, hot gas solenoid or the


associated circuitry. The zone 1 hot 3. With the hot gas valve energized using Interface Board Test

gas relay, LED and fuse F7 are Mode check the current flow using the Gauge Menu.

located on the Interface Board. The Current should be from 0.5 – 3.0 amps.

zone 2 hot gas relay, LED and fuse


F200 are located on the Multi-Temp 4. With the hot gas valve energized using Interface Board Test

Option Board. The wiring is located Mode check for 12 volts across the hot gas valve

in the Controller Harness and connector.

Evaporator Zone Harness.


5. Check the hot gas valve coil with an ohmmeter for
continuity.

6. Check the Controller Harness and Evaporator Zone


Harness wires for continuity per Service Procedure H04A.
See the wiring diagram for details.

5-38 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 54 – Test Mode Timeout


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

54 Test Mode Timeout. This is a Operator Help


shutdown alarm. 1. Report alarm at end of the day.

The unit was placed in a Service Technical Help


Test Mode function and no other 1. While in Service Test Mode, if no other function is selected

Test Mode function was selected for within 15 minutes the unit will shut down and record Alarm

15 minutes. Code 54. Clear the alarm and re-enter Service Test Mode if
necessary to complete the diagnosis or repair.

Alarm Code 61 – Low Battery Voltage


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

61 Low Battery Voltage. This is a log, Operator Help


check or shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
The battery voltage is low. the day.

Technical Help
1. Check for discharged (run down) battery.

2. Check the battery terminals for tightness and corrosion.

3. With the engine running check the battery voltage using the
Gauge Menu. See Section 4 for details.

4. With the engine running check the battery charge rate using
the Gauge Menu. See Section 4 for details.

5. Check alternator operation.

17 January 2003 5-39


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 62 – Ammeter Out of Calibration


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

62 Ammeter Out of Calibration. This Operator Help


is a shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately.
The ammeter cannot be properly
calibrated and the readings may be Technical Help
incorrect. 1. Check the shunt resister using an ohmmeter.

2. Check the control system using Service Procedure A01A.

5-40 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 63 – Engine Stopped


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

63 Engine Stopped. This is a log or Operator Help


shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
Indicates that the unit was running the day.
and still should be but has stopped.
Technical Help
This alarm may occur as a result of 1. Perform a Pretrip Test to determine cause for shutdown.

intermittent contact.
2. Check the fuel level.

3. Check the fuel pump for proper operation.

4. Check the air cleaner and intake hose for obstructions.

5. Check the unit fuses.

6. Check the RPM sensor for proper operation.

7. Check for low battery voltage.

8. Be sure all ground connections on the master ground plate


are secure.

9. Check suction pressure regulator and/or throttling valve for


proper operation.

17 January 2003 5-41


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 64 – Pretrip Reminder

Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

64 Pretrip Reminder. This is a log Operator Help


alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

The unit is due for a Pretrip Test. Technical Help


1. Perform a Pretrip Test to confirm unit operation. Reset the
Pretrip Reminder hourmeter after successful test
completion.

Alarm Code 66 – Low Engine Oil Level


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

66 Low Engine Oil Level. This is a log Operator Help


or shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
Indicates that the engine oil level is the day.
low. The switch is located on the
side of the engine in the oil pan. Technical Help
The switch is open with full oil level 1. Check the engine oil level.

and closed with low oil level. The


wiring is located in the Interface 2. Check the switch with an ohmmeter. It should be open

Harness via the OLSP-01 and when the oil level is satisfactory.

OLSN-01 circuits.
3. Check pins 12 and 29 on the 36 pin Interface Board
Connector for a pushed pin, loose pin crimp or broken wire.

4. Check the harness wires OLSP-01 and OLSN-01with an


ohmmeter for continuity per Service Procedure H04A.

5-42 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 67 – Check Liquid Line Solenoid (in Indicated Zone)


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

67 Check Liquid Line Solenoid Operator Help


Circuit (in Indicated Zone). This is 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing repair
a check or shutdown alarm that only immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of the day.
occurs during a Pretrip Test.
Technical Help
On multi-temp units a liquid line 1. Check interface board fuse F7 (Zone 1) or multi-temp option

solenoid is located in the remote board fuse F200 (Zone 2).

evaporator for each zone. The


affected zone will be identified 2. Check the operation of the liquid line solenoid in the

along with this alarm code. appropriate zone using Interface Board Test Mode in the
Maintenance Menu. See Section 4 for details.

A problem exists with the liquid line


relay, liquid line solenoid or the 3. With the liquid line solenoid energized using Interface Board

associated circuitry. The zone 1 Test Mode check the current flow using the Gauge Menu.

liquid line solenoid relay, LED and Current should be from 0.5 – 3.0 amps.

fuse F7 are located on the Interface


Board. The zone 2 liquid line 4. With the liquid line solenoid energized using Interface Board

solenoid relay, LED and fuse F200 Test Mode check for 12 volts across the liquid line solenoid

are located on the Multi-Temp connector.

Option Board. The wiring is located


in the Controller Harness and 5. Check the liquid line solenoid coil with an ohmmeter for

Evaporator Zone Harness. continuity.

6. Check the Controller Harness and Evaporator Zone


Harness wires for continuity per Service Procedure H04A.
See the wiring diagram for details.

17 January 2003 5-43


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 68 – Internal Controller Fault Code


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

68 Internal Controller Fault Code. Operator Help


This is a log alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

Technical Help
1. Check the control system using Service Procedure A01A.

Alarm Code 70 – Hourmeter Failure


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

70 Hourmeter Failure. This is a log Operator Help


alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

Indicates that the hourmeter Technical Help


exceeds 499,999 hours or that a 1. Check Hourmeters 1, 2 and 3. If the reading is normal,

problem occurred when the perform a Cold Start per Service Procedure A07A. If the

microprocessor attempted to write code can now be cleared, proceed with microprocessor

to the hourmeter memory. setup using Service Procedure A04A.

CAUTION: The microprocessor must be set up using


Service Procedure A04A any time a Cold Start is
performed.

5-44 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 74 – Controller Reset to Defaults


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

74 Controller Reset to Defaults. This Operator Help


is a check alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

Indicates that all programmable Technical Help


values have been set to the default 1. Complete the microprocessor setup using Service

values. Procedure A04A.

2. Alarm code 74 will be cleared during the microprocessor


setup using Service Procedure A04A.

3. Verify that interface board Jumper X2 is in the correct


position.

CAUTION: Failure to perform the above setup procedures


after a Code 74 alarm will result in the unit failing to
perform to customer specifications.

Alarm Code 79 – Data Log Overflow


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

79 Data Log Overflow. This is a log Operator Help


alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

Technical Help
1. No corrective action possible. This indicates that an event
occurred that was not recorded by the data logger.

17 January 2003 5-45


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 80 – Failed Compressor Temperature Sensor


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

80 Failed Compressor Temperature Operator Help


Sensor. This is a check alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

A problem exists with the sensor or Technical Help


its wiring. The sensor is located in 1. Check the sensor reading using the Gauges Menu. If the

the scroll compressor housing. The display shows [----], the sensor is defective or the circuit is

wiring is part of the Controller open or shorted.

Harness and is connected to the


microprocessor at the 35 pin 2. Check pins 35 and 12 on the J3 35 pin interface board

microprocessor connector. Consult connector (CPTP-01 and CPTN-01 wires) for a pushed pin

the unit wiring diagrams for or loose pin crimp or broken wire.

complete information.
3. Check the harness wires CPTP-01 and CPTN-01 with an

NOTE: If all the Sensor Codes ohmmeter per Service Procedure H04A.

(02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11 and 12) are


present, the microprocessor may 4. Check the control system using Service Procedure A01A.

be defective or a problem may


exist with the 35 pin sensor
connector at the microprocessor.

5-46 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 82 – High Compressor Temperature Shutdown


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

82 High Compressor Temperature Operator Help


Shutdown. This is a prevent alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down on this alarm code and the display is
flashing repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at
The compressor temperature is end of the day.
excessive as sensed by the
compressor temperature sensor. Technical Help
The sensor is located in the scroll 1. Check the refrigerant level.

compressor housing. The wiring is


part of the Interface Harness and is 2. Check for air in the system.

connected to the microprocessor


through the Interface Board. 3. Check refrigeration system for proper operation.

Consult the unit wiring diagrams for


complete information. 4. Check compressor temperature sensor operation as shown
under Alarm Code 80.

17 January 2003 5-47


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 84 – Restart Null


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

84 Restart Null. This is associated Operator Help


with a prevent alarm. The alarm 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.
clears automatically if the condition
does not re-occur. Technical Help
1. Check for associated alarms and repair as required.

This alarm occurs if unit operation is


prevented as a result of the
associated prevent alarm. For
example, if a high discharge
pressure condition shuts the unit
down, a waiting period is provided
to allow system pressures to
equalize. A restart will occur when
conditions permit.

Alarm Code 85 – Forced Unit Operation


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

85 Forced Unit Operation. This is Operator Help


associated with a prevent alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.
For example, high coolant
temperature may cause the unit to Technical Help
switch to low speed until the coolant 1. Check for associated alarms and repair as required.

temperature falls. The alarm clears


automatically if the condition does
not re-occur.

This alarm occurs if unit operation


is changed as a result of the
associated prevent alarm.

5-48 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 86 – Failed Discharge Pressure Transducer


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

86 Failed Discharge Pressure Operator Help


Transducer. This is a check alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

A problem exists with the sensor or Technical Help


its wiring. The sensor is located 1. Check the discharge pressure display using the Gauge

near the scroll compressor Menu.

discharge port. The wiring is part of


the Controller Harness and is 2. If the discharge pressure is not displayed by the

connected to the microprocessor at microprocessor unplug the transducer and check for

the 35 pin microprocessor +5 Vdc between DPP-01 and DPN-01. If 5 volts is not

connector. Consult the unit wiring present check the microprocessor using Service Procedure

diagrams for complete information. A01A.

3. Check the harness wires DPP-01, DPN-01 and DP-01 for


continuity using an ohmmeter.

4. Connect refrigeration gauges to verify that transducer is not


displaying the correct pressure. Replace the transducer.

17 January 2003 5-49


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 87 – Failed Suction Pressure Transducer


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

87 Failed Suction Pressure Operator Help


Transducer. This is a check alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

A problem exists with the sensor or Technical Help


its wiring. The sensor is located on 1. Check the suction pressure display using the Gauge Menu.

the throttling valve at the scroll


compressor. The wiring is part of 2. If the suction pressure is not displayed by the

the Controller Harness and is microprocessor unplug the transducer and check for

connected to the microprocessor at +5 Vdc between SPP-01 and SPN-01. If 5 volts is not

the 35 pin microprocessor present check the control system using Service Procedure

connector. Consult the unit wiring A01A.

diagrams for complete information.


3. Check the harness wires SPP-01, SPN-01 and SP-01 for
continuity using an ohmmeter.

4. Connect refrigeration gauges to verify that transducer is not


displaying the correct pressure. Replace the transducer.

5-50 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 90 – Electric Overload


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

90 Electric Overload. This is a log, Operator Help


check or shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
the day.

Technical Help
CAUTION: High voltage is present any time the unit is
connected to standby power. Exercise extreme care.

1. Check the electric motor for current draw. Refer to the


motor nameplate for the Full Load Amperage rating (FLA)
of the motor.

2. Check the setting of the motor overload relay. It should be


10% greater than full load rating of the motor.

3. Check the throttling valve and suction pressure regulators


for the correct settings.

4. Check the EOL-01 Circuit for continuity from P16 on the


interface board to the overload relay.

5. Check for continuity between the overload relay terminals


95 and 96. The contacts should be normally closed.

6. Check the EOL-02 Circuit for continuity to chassis ground.

7. If the EOL-01 circuit is grounded test the control system per


Service Procedure A01A.

17 January 2003 5-51


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 91 – Check Electric Ready Input


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

91 Check Electric Ready Input. This Operator Help


is a log, check or shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
the day.

Technical Help
CAUTION: High voltage is present any time the unit is
connected to standby power. Exercise extreme care.

1. Confirm the LED on the phase detect module is on when


standby power is connected to the unit.

2. Check the ER-01 Circuit from the phase detect module for
12 volts to chassis ground when standby power is
connected to the unit.

3. Check the 8F-01 circuit at the phase detect module for 12


volts.

4. Check to be sure standby power of the correct voltage is


present at L1, L2 and L3 on the phase detect module.

5. Check the ER-01 Circuit for continuity from P16 on the


interface board to the phase detect module.

6. If steps 1-5 above are correct, check the control system


using Service Procedure A01A.

7. If steps 1, 2, 4 or 5 above are not correct replace the phase


detect module.

5-52 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 92 – Sensor Grade not Set


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

92 Sensor Grades Not Set. This is a Operator Help


log alarm that only occurs during a 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.
Pretrip Test.
Technical Help
The sensor grades of the graded 1. Verify actual sensor grades for all graded sensors.

sensors are set to grade 5H. This


indicates they have not been 2. Using this information, calibrate the sensors using the

properly set. Sensor Calibration feature in the Maintenance Menu. See


Section 4 for details.

Alarm Code 93 – Low Compressor Suction Pressure


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

93 Low Compressor Suction Operator Help


Pressure. This is a prevent alarm. 1. If the unit shuts down on this alarm code and the display is
flashing repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at
Compressor suction pressure is end of the day.
less than or equal to 0 PSIG.
Technical Help
1. Install gauge set and confirm that suction pressure is low
and matches the reading shown on the Gauge Menu. See
Section 4 for more information on using the Gauge Menu.

2. If suction pressure is low diagnose the refrigeration system


as required.

3. If the suction pressure displayed by the Gauge Menu is


incorrect, check the suction pressure transducer as shown
in Alarm Code 87.

17 January 2003 5-53


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 106 – Check Purge Valve Circuit


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

106 Check Purge Valve Circuit. This is Operator Help


a check or shutdown alarm that only 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
occurs during a Pretrip Test. repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
the day.
A problem exists with the purge
valve output, purge valve or the Technical Help
associated circuitry. The purge 1. Check interface board fuse F17.

valve LED and fuse F17 are located


on the Interface Board. The wiring 2. Check the operation of the purge valve using Interface

is located in the Interface Harness Board Test Mode in the Maintenance Menu. See Section 4

via the PVP-01 and PVN-01 for details.

circuits.
3. With the purge valve energized using Interface Board Test
Mode check the current flow using the Gauge Menu.
Current should be from 0.5 – 3.0 amps.

4. With the purge valve energized using Interface Board Test


Mode check for 12 volts across the purge valve connector.

5. Check the purge valve coil with an ohmmeter for continuity.

6. Check the Interface Harness wires PVP-01 and PVN-01


with an ohmmeter for continuity per Service Procedure
H04A.

5-54 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 107 – Check Condenser Inlet Solenoid Circuit


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

107 Check Condenser Inlet Solenoid Operator Help


Circuit. This is a check or 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
shutdown alarm that only occurs repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
during a Pretrip Test. the day.

A problem exists with the Technical Help


condenser inlet solenoid output, 1. Check interface board fuse F21.

condenser inlet solenoid or the


associated circuitry. The condenser 2. Check the operation of the condenser inlet solenoid using

inlet solenoid LED and fuse F21 are Interface Board Test Mode in the Maintenance Menu. See

located on the Interface Board. The Section 4 for details.

wiring is located in the Interface


Harness via the CISP-01 and 3. With the condenser inlet solenoid energized using Interface

CISN-01 circuits. Board Test Mode check the current flow using the Gauge
Menu. Current should be from 0.5 – 3.0 amps.

4. With the condenser inlet solenoid energized using Interface


Board Test Mode check for 12 volts across the condenser
inlet solenoid connector.

5. Check the condenser inlet solenoid coil with an ohmmeter


for continuity.

6. Check the Interface Harness wires CISP-01 and CISN-01


with an ohmmeter for continuity per Service Procedure
H04A.

17 January 2003 5-55


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 108 – Door Open Timeout


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

108 Door Open Timeout. This is a Operator Help


check alarm. 1. Close doors. Report this alarm at end of the day.

The door or doors equipped with Technical Help


door switches were open longer 1. Check operation of door switches.

than the programmed time interval.

5-56 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 110 – Check Suction Line Solenoid (in Indicated Zone)
Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

110 Check Suction Line Solenoid Operator Help


Circuit (in Indicated Zone). This is 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
a check or shutdown alarm that only repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
occurs during a Pretrip Test. the day.

On multi-temp units a suction line Technical Help


solenoid is located in the remote 1. Check interface board fuse F7 (Zone 1) or multi-temp

evaporator for each zone. The option board fuse F200 (Zone 2).

affected zone will be identified


along with this alarm code. 2. Check the operation of the suction line solenoid in the
appropriate zone using Interface Board Test Mode in the

A problem exists with the suction Maintenance Menu. See Section 4 for details.

line relay, suction line solenoid or


the associated circuitry. The zone 1 3. With the suction line solenoid energized using Interface

suction line solenoid relay, LED and Board Test Mode check the current flow using the Gauge

fuse F7 are located on the Interface Menu. Current should be from 0.5 – 3.0 amps.

Board. The zone 2 suction line


solenoid relay, LED and fuse F200 4. With the suction line solenoid energized using Interface

are located on the Multi-Temp Board Test Mode check for 12 volts across the suction line

Option Board. The wiring is located solenoid connector.

in the Controller Harness and


Evaporator Zone Harness. 5. Check the suction line solenoid coil with an ohmmeter for
continuity.

6. Check the Controller Harness and Evaporator Zone


Harness wires for continuity per Service Procedure H04A.
See the wiring diagram for details.

17 January 2003 5-57


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 111 – Unit Not Configured Correctly


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

111 Unit Not Configured Correctly. Operator Help


This is a log or check alarm that 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.
only occurs during a Pretrip Test.
Technical Help
Components have been detected 1. Verify actual unit configuration.

during a Pretrip Test that are not


configured. 2. Set the unit configuration using the Unit Configuration
sub-menu of the Programming Menu as shown in Service
Procedure A04A.

5-58 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 112 – Check Remote Fans (in Indicated Zone)


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

112 Check Remote Fans (in Indicated Operator Help


Zone). This is a check or shutdown 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
alarm that only occurs during a repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
Pretrip Test. the day.

On multi-temp units fan motors are Technical Help


located in the remote evaporator for 1. Check the motor fuses for the affected zone.

each zone. The affected zone will


be identified along with this alarm 2. Check the operation of the fan motor relay in the

code. appropriate zone using Interface Board Test Mode in the


Maintenance Menu. See Section 4 for details.

A problem exists with the fan motor


relay, fan motor or the associated 3. With the fan motor relay energized using Interface Board

circuitry. The zone 1 fan motor Test Mode check the current flow using the Gauge Menu.

relay and LED are located on the Current should be greater than 0.5 amps.

Interface Board. The zone 2 fan


motor relay and LED are located on 4. With the fan motor relay energized using Interface Board

the Multi-Temp Option Board. The Test Mode check for 12 volts across the fan motor.

wiring is located in the Zone Fan


Harness and Evaporator Fan 5. Check the fan motors for proper operation.

Harness. The fuses are in-line


fuses located in the evaporator fan 6. Check the Zone Fan Harness and Evaporator Fan Harness

harness. wires for continuity per Service Procedure H04A. See the
wiring diagram for details.

17 January 2003 5-59


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 114 – Multiple Alarms, Can Not Run


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

114 Multiple Alarms, Can Not Run. Operator Help


This is a shutdown alarm. 1. If the unit is shut down and the alarm display is flashing
repair immediately.
The unit cannot run because of
multiple unit shutdown alarms or Technical Help
because check alarms exist that 1. Check for associated alarms and repair as required.

have shut down all zones.

Alarm Code 115 – High Pressure Cutout Switch Failure


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

115 High Pressure Cut Out Switch Operator Help


Failure. This is a prevent alarm. 1. If the unit is shut down and the display is flashing repair
immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of the day.

Technical Help
1. Check the high pressure cutout switch with an ohmmeter.
The contacts should be closed with normal pressures and
open if the system pressure is excessive.

5-60 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 117 – Auto Switched from Diesel To Electric


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

117 Auto Switched from Diesel to Operator Help


Electric. This is a log alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

The unit switched from diesel to Technical Help


electric mode operation during a 1. Information only. No action required.

Pretrip Test.

17 January 2003 5-61


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 118 – Auto Switched from Electric to Diesel


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

118 Auto Switched from Electric to Operator Help


Diesel. This is a log alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

The unit switched from diesel to Technical Help


electric mode operation during a 1. Information only. No action required.

Pretrip Test.

5-62 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 120 – Check Alternator Excite Circuit


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

120 Check Alternator Excite Circuit. Operator Help


This is a check or shutdown alarm 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
that only occurs during a Pretrip repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
Test. the day.

A problem exists with the alternator Technical Help


excite relay or the associated 1. Check interface board fuse F8.

circuitry. The alternator excite relay,


LED and fuse F8 are located on the 2. Check the operation of the alternator excite relay using

Interface Board. The wiring is Interface Board Test Mode in the Maintenance Menu. See

located in the Interface Harness via Section 4 for details.

the EXC-01 circuits.


3. With the alternator excite relay energized using Interface
Board Test Mode, check the current flow using the Gauge
Menu. Current should be from 0.25 – 3.0 amps.

4. With the alternator excite relay energized using Interface


Board Test Mode check for 12 volts at the alternator excite
terminal.

5. Check the Interface Harness wires EXC-01 with an


ohmmeter for continuity per Service Procedure H04A.

17 January 2003 5-63


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 121 – Check Liquid Injection Circuit


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

121 Check Liquid Injection Circuit. Operator Help


This is a check or shutdown alarm 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
that only occurs during a Pretrip repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
Test. the day.

A problem exists with the liquid Technical Help


injection valve relay, liquid injection 1. Check interface board fuse F22.

valve or the associated circuitry.


The liquid injection valve LED and 2. Check the operation of the liquid injection valve using

fuse F22 are located on the Interface Board Test Mode in the Maintenance Menu. See

Interface Board. The wiring is Section 4 for details.

located in the Interface Harness via


the LIQP-01 and LIQN-01 circuits. 3. With the liquid injection valve energized using Interface
Board Test Mode check the current flow using the Gauge
Menu. Current should be from 0.5 – 3.0 amps.

4. With the liquid injection valve energized using Interface


Board Test Mode check for 12 volts across the liquid
injection valve connector.

5. Check the liquid injection valve coil with an ohmmeter for


continuity.

6. Check the Interface Harness wires LIQP-01 and LIQN-01


with an ohmmeter for continuity per Service Procedure
H04A.

5-64 17 January 2003


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 122 – Check Diesel/Electric Circuit


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

122 Check Diesel/Electric Circuit. Operator Help


This is a check or shutdown alarm 1. If the unit shuts down and the alarm display is flashing
that only occurs during a Pretrip repair immediately. Otherwise, report this alarm at end of
Test. the day.

A problem exists with the Technical Help


diesel/electric relay or the 1. Check the operation of the diesel/electric relay using

associated circuitry. The Interface Board Test Mode in the Maintenance Menu. See

diesel/electric relay and LED are Section 4 for details.

located on the Interface Board. The


wiring is located in the 50 Harness 2. With the diesel/electric relay energized using Interface

via the 7EH-01 circuits. Board Test Mode, check the current flow using the Gauge
Menu. Current should be from 0.25 – 3.0 amps.

3. Check the 50 Harness wires 7EH-01 with an ohmmeter for


continuity per Service Procedure H04A.

Alarm Code 127 – Setpoint Not Entered (in Indicated Zone)


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

127 Setpoint Not Entered (in Operator Help


Indicated Zone). This is a check 1. Be sure the setpoint is adjusted to the required
alarm. temperature.

The setpoint was changed but was Technical Help


not loaded by pressing the Yes/No 1. Information only. Be sure setpoint is adjusted properly.

keys.

17 January 2003 5-65


Alarm Code 128 – Engine Run Time Maintenance Reminder #1
Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

128 Engine Run Time Maintenance Operator Help


Reminder #1. This is a log alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

The indicated hourmeter has Technical Help


exceeded the programmed time 1. Perform required maintenance as dictated by owner

limit. requirements. Reset hourmeter limit after completion using


Maintenance Hourmeter menu. See Section 4 for details.

Alarm Code 129 – Engine Run Time Maintenance Reminder #2


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

129 Engine Run Time Maintenance Operator Help


Reminder #2. This is a log alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

The indicated hourmeter has Technical Help


exceeded the programmed time 1. Perform required maintenance as dictated by owner

limit. requirements. Reset hourmeter limit after completion using


Maintenance Hourmeter menu. See Section 4 for details.

Alarm Code 130 – Electric Run Time Maintenance Reminder #1


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

130 Electric Run Time Maintenance Operator Help


Reminder #1. This is a log alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

The indicated hourmeter has Technical Help


exceeded the programmed time Perform required maintenance as dictated by owner

limit. requirements. Reset hourmeter limit after completion using


Maintenance Hourmeter menu. See Section 4 for details.
Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 131 – Electric Run Time Maintenance Reminder #2


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

131 Electric Run Time Maintenance Operator Help


Reminder #2. This is a log alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

The indicated hourmeter has Technical Help


exceeded the programmed time 1. Perform required maintenance as dictated by owner

limit. requirements. Reset hourmeter limit after completion using


Maintenance Hourmeter menu. See Section 4 for details.

Alarm Code 132 – Total Unit Run Time Maintenance Reminder #1


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

132 Total Unit Run Time Maintenance Operator Help


Reminder #1. This is a log alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

The indicated hourmeter has Technical Help


exceeded the programmed time 1. Perform required maintenance as dictated by owner

limit. requirements. Reset hourmeter limit after completion using


Maintenance Hourmeter menu. See Section 4 for details.

Alarm Code 133 – Total Unit Run Time Maintenance Reminder #2


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

133 Total Unit Run Time Maintenance Operator Help


Reminder #2. This is a log alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

The indicated hourmeter has Technical Help


exceeded the programmed time 1. Perform required maintenance as dictated by owner

limit. requirements. Reset hourmeter limit after completion using


Maintenance Hourmeter menu. See Section 4 for details.

17 January 2003 5-67


Section 5 — SPECTRUM Diagnostics

Alarm Code 134 – Controller Power On Hours


Code Description and Type Corrective Action (check in order shown)

134 Controller Power On Hours. This Operator Help


is a log alarm. 1. Report this alarm at end of the day.

The indicated hourmeter has Technical Help


exceeded the programmed time 1. Perform required maintenance as dictated by owner

limit. requirements. Reset hourmeter limit after completion using


Maintenance Hourmeter menu. See Section 4 for details.

5-68 17 January 2003


Section 6 —
SPECTRUM Service Procedure Index
Microprocessor Procedures
A01A Control System Functional Test
A01B HMI Control Panel Functional Test
A02A Recording Existing Microprocessor Settings
A03A Replacement of the Microprocessor, Interface Board, Multi-Temperature Option Board or Power
Supply Board
A04A Microprocessor Setup
A07A Performing a Cold Start
A15A Temperature Sensor Grade Calibration
A21A Download Data Logger and Display Data
A26A Welding on Units Equipped with SPECTRUM Microprocessors
A46A Flash Loading Microprocessor Software
A48A Phase Detect Module Operation and Diagnostics

Sensor Procedures
D01A Temperature Sensor Test
D03A Pressure Sensor Test

Engine & Other Sensor or Switch Procedures


F01A Checking and Replacing the Oil Level Switch
F05A Checking the Oil Pressure Switch
F07A Coolant Level Sensor Test
F08A Coolant Temperature Sensor Test
F09A RPM Sensor Test and Adjustment

Miscellaneous Procedures
H04A Wiring Harness Continuity Test
Service Procedure A01A

A01A
Control System Functional Test

Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To confirm operation of the microprocessor, interface board and 5 Vdc power supply assembly.

Table of Contents
Control System Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Materials Required
• Fluke Digital Multimeter.

Operation
The microprocessor, interface board, HMI Control Panel and 5 Vdc power supply operate as a control assembly
and must be tested as such. The following procedure allows the technician to determine if the microprocessor or
interface board requires replacement.

Important Notes
• Replace only one component at a time to be certain the problem component is correctly identified.

• If a fuse is installed on the interface board in position F5 as part of the diagnostic routine, be sure it is
removed before the unit is released for service.

A01A - Page 1 P41RA01A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A01A

Diagnostic Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1. Test for battery voltage (12 Vdc If this voltage is low or missing
or higher) at the 2 and CH check the following to
terminals on the interface determine the cause:
board.
Unit battery.

60 amp fuse at the unit battery.

Continuity of the 2 and CH


circuits to the interface board.

2. Turn on the unit On/Off switch If this voltage is low or missing


(the rocker switch on the side of check the following to
the unit) and test for battery determine the cause:
voltage at the #8 circuit on the
Fuse F16 on the interface
interface board.
board.

Unit On/Off rocker switch and


its wiring.

3. Press the On key on the HMI The red LED on the 5 Vdc The 5 Vdc power supply board
Control Panel. power supply board should turn is located at the lower right
on. portion of the interface board.

4. If the red LED on the power The red LED on the 5 Vdc This supplies test battery
supply board is not lit power supply board should turn voltage to the 5 Vdc power
temporarily install a 5 amp fuse on. supply board.
in the F5 fuse holder on the
interface board.

CAUTION: This should


cause the unit to start and
run.

P41RA01A - 17 January 2003 A01A - Page 2


Service Procedure A01A

Step Action Result Comments

5. If the red LED on the power The correct orientation of the


supply board is now lit check board is with the LED at the
the HMI Control Panel as bottom and the printing
shown in Service Procedure readable.
A01B. If the red LED on the
5 Vdc power supply board is
still not lit replace the 5 Vdc
power supply board.

6. If the red LED on the power If the unit does not start and run Several other LEDs will be lit as
supply board is lit the Run replace the microprocessor. well.
Relay LED should be lit and the
See Service Procedure A03A to
unit should start and run.
remove and replace the control
system components.

7. If the unit still does not start and See Service Procedure A03A to
run with the new remove and replace the control
microprocessor installed, system components.
reinstall the original
microprocessor and replace the
interface board.

8. After diagnostics are complete Be sure all connections and


remove the 5 amp fuse from harnesses are secure and held
position F5 on the interface in place with cable ties.
board.

A01A - Page 3 P41RA01A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A01B

A01B
HMI Control Panel Functional Test

Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units with HMI Control Panels

Purpose
To confirm operation of the HMI Control Panel.

Table of Contents
HMI Control System Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Materials Required
• Fluke Digital Multimeter.

Operation
The HMI Control Panel receives power directly from the unit battery via the 2A circuit.

CAUTION: Power is present on the HMI Control Panel even if the unit On/Off switch is turned off.

The following procedure allows the technician to determine if the HMI Control Panel requires replacement.

Important Notes
• Replace only one component at a time to be certain the problem component is correctly identified.

• If a fuse is installed on the interface board in position F5 as part of the diagnostic routine be sure it is removed
before the unit is released for service.

A01B - Page 1 P41RA01B - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A01B

Diagnostic Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1. Perform an HMI Control Panel If the HMI Control Panel passes


Self Test as shown in Section 4 the test it can be assumed to
of this manual. be functional.

2. If the HMI Control Panel does Battery voltage should be


not power up, check the present at fuse F15. If battery
voltage from fuse F15 to CH. voltage is not present check
the 2A circuit.

3. If battery voltage is present at Battery voltage should be


fuse F15 and the HMI Control present on the harness
Panel does not power up, connector between pin P1
disconnect the harness (2A Power) and pin P2 (CH). If
connector at the rear of the battery voltage is not present
HMI Control Panel. check the HMI Control Panel
harness.

4. If battery voltage is present on


the harness connector between
pin P1 (2A Power) and pin P2
(CH) and the HMI Control
Panel does not power up when
connected, the HMI Control
Panel must be replaced.

P41RA01B - 17 January 2003 A01B - Page 2


Service Procedure A01B

Step Action Result Comments

5. Perform the HMI Control The HMI Control Panel must This confirms proper unit
Panel Self Test as shown in pass the test. operation.
Section 4.

6. After diagnostics are complete Be sure all connections and


remove the 5 amp fuse from harnesses are secure and held
position F5 on the interface in place with cable ties.
board.

A01B - Page 3 P41RA01B - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A02A

A02A
Recording Existing Microprocessor Settings

Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To retrieve and record the current settings of a microprocessor

Table of Contents
Recording Existing Microprocessor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Guarded Access Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Setup Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Materials Required
• Prepare a copy of the Setup Sheet at the back of this Service Procedure.

Operation
• The settings of the programmable features must be retrieved before replacing a microprocessor or performing
a Cold Start. These settings will then be duplicated in the replacement microprocessor or after the Cold Start.

• The Guarded Access Menu Overview on the next page may prove helpful.

• See Section 3 for a complete description of programmable features.

• The default settings are shown on the Setup Sheet at the back of this Service Procedure.

• If a sensor grade is not shown on the setup sheet physically check the sensor to determine the grade. It is
important that sensor grades be set properly.

A02A - Page 1 P41RA02A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A02A

Guarded Access Menu Overview

P41RA02A - 17 January 2003 A02A - Page 2


Service Procedure A02A

Procedure
Consult the Programming Menu Overview on the previous page for specific menu information.

Step Action Result Comments

1. Turn the unit on.

2. Press the MENU key. The Operator Menu appears.

3. Press the NEXT key as The Hourmeter Display Menu


required to display the appears.
Hourmeter Display Menu.

4. When the Hourmeter Display Total Hours (or the first


Menu is shown press the viewable hourmeter reading)
SELECT key to access the and the current reading appear.
Hourmeter Display Menu. Record the reading on the
Setup Sheet.

5. Use the NEXT and/or Record the reading of each Only hourmeters programmed
PREVIOUS keys to scroll hourmeter on the Setup Sheet. to be viewable in the Viewable
through all viewable Hourmeter Submenu will
hourmeters. appear.

6. When all hourmeter readings


have been recorded press the
EXIT key to return to the
Operator Menu.

7. Press and hold both the EXIT The Maintenance Menu


and unlabeled key for 5 appears.
seconds.

8. Press the NEXT key as The Sensor Calibration Menu


required to display the Sensor appears.
Calibration Menu.

A02A - Page 3 P41RA02A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A02A

Step Action Result Comments

9. When the Sensor Calibration Zone 1 Return Air Sensor


Menu is shown press the Grade and the current grade
SELECT key to access the appear. Record the grade on
Sensor Calibration Menu. the Setup Sheet.

10. Use the NEXT and/or Record the grade of each


PREVIOUS keys to scroll sensor on the Setup Sheet.
through all sensors.

11. When all sensor grades have


been recorded press the EXIT
key to return to the
Maintenance Menu.

12. Press the NEXT key as


required to display the Revision
Menu.

13. Use the NEXT and/or Record the software revisions


PREVIOUS keys to scroll on the Setup Sheet.
through the HMI Control Panel
and Microprocessor software
revisions.

14. When the software revisions


have been recorded press the
EXIT key to return to the
Maintenance Menu.

15. Press the NEXT key as


required to display the Time
and Date Menu.

P41RA02A - 17 January 2003 A02A - Page 4


Service Procedure A02A

Step Action Result Comments

16. Check the Time to determine Record the time zone on the Compare local time to unit time
the time zone used by the Setup Sheet. to determine time zone.
customer.

17. When the time and date have The NEXT soft key will
been checked press the NEXT disappear and only the
key to reach the end of the PREVIOUS key will be shown.
Maintenance Menu.

18. Press and hold both the EXIT The Access Code Challenge
and unlabeled key for 5 appears.
seconds.

19. Enter “1” or the required Access The Programmable Features Most units will be “1”.
Code. Menu appears.

20. Record the Access Code on the


Setup Sheet.

21. Press the SELECT key to Temperature Units appears.


access the Programmable
Features Setup Menu.

22. Use the NEXT and/or Record all Programmable


PREVIOUS keys to scroll Features settings on the Setup
through all features in the Sheet.
Programmable Features Setup
Menu.

23. When all Programmable


Features have been recorded
press the EXIT key to return to
the Programmable Features
Setup Menu.

A02A - Page 5 P41RA02A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A02A

Step Action Result Comments

24. Press the NEXT key to display The Hourmeter Setup Menu
the Hourmeter Setup Menu. appears.

25. When the Hourmeter Setup The Program Hourmeter


Menu is shown press the Submenu appears.
SELECT key to access the
Program Hourmeter Submenu.

26. Press the SELECT key to Total Run Time Reminder #1


access the Program Hourmeter appears.
Submenu.

27. Use the NEXT and/or Record the setting of each


PREVIOUS keys to scroll Program Hourmeter Submenu
through all the Program feature on the Setup Sheet.
Hourmeter Submenu features.

28. When all Program Hourmeter The Program Hourmeter


Submenu features have been Submenu appears.
recorded press the EXIT key to
return to the Program
Hourmeter Submenu.

29. When the Program Hourmeter The Viewable Hourmeter


Submenu is shown press the Submenu appears.
NEXT key to chose the
Viewable Hourmeter Submenu.

30. Press the SELECT key to Total Run Hours Viewing


access the Viewable Hourmeter appears.
Submenu.

P41RA02A - 17 January 2003 A02A - Page 6


Service Procedure A02A

Step Action Result Comments

31. Use the NEXT and/or Record the setting of each


PREVIOUS keys to scroll Viewable Hourmeter Submenu
through all the Viewable feature on the Setup Sheet.
Hourmeter Submenu features.

32. When all Viewable Hourmeter The Viewable Hourmeter


Submenu features have been Submenu appears.
recorded press the EXIT key to
return to the Viewable
Hourmeter Submenu.

33. Press the EXIT key again to The Hourmeter Setup Menu
return to the Hourmeter Setup appears.
Menu.

34. When the Hourmeter Setup The Cycle Sentry Setup Menu
Menu is shown press the NEXT appears.
key to access the Cycle Sentry
Setup Menu.

35. When the Cycle Sentry Setup The Cycle Sentry Amps will
Menu is shown press the appear.
SELECT key to access the
Cycle Sentry Setup Menu.

36. Use the NEXT and/or Record the setting of each


PREVIOUS keys to scroll Cycle Sentry feature on the
through the Cycle Sentry Setup Sheet.
features.

37. When all Cycle Sentry features


have been recorded press the
EXIT key to return to the Cycle
Sentry Setup Menu.

A02A - Page 7 P41RA02A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A02A

Step Action Result Comments

38. When the Cycle Sentry Setup


Menu is shown press the NEXT
key to access the Defrost Setup
Menu.

39. When the Defrost Menu is The Defrost Interval In Range -


shown press the SELECT key Fresh Setpoint will appear.
to access the Defrost Setup
Menu.

40. Use the NEXT and/or Record the setting of each


PREVIOUS keys to scroll Defrost feature on the Setup
through the Defrost features. Sheet.

41. When all Defrost features have


been recorded press the EXIT
key to return to the Defrost
Setup Menu.

42. When the Defrost Setup Menu


is shown press the NEXT key to
access the Language Setup
Menu.

43. When the Language Setup The Default Language will


Menu is shown press the appear.
SELECT key to access the
Language Setup Menu.

44. Use the NEXT and/or Record the setting of each


PREVIOUS keys to scroll Language feature on the Setup
through the Language features. Sheet.

P41RA02A - 17 January 2003 A02A - Page 8


Service Procedure A02A

Step Action Result Comments

45. When all Language features


have been recorded press the
EXIT key to return to the
Language Setup Menu.

46. When the Language Setup The Access Code has already
Menu is shown press the NEXT been recorded.
key to access the Access Code
Setup Menu.

47. Press the NEXT key again to


access the Unit Configuration
Setup Menu.

48. When the Unit Configuration The Compressor Type will


Setup Menu is shown press the appear.
SELECT key to access the Unit
Configuration Setup Menu.

49. Use the NEXT and/or Record the setting of each Unit
PREVIOUS keys to scroll Configuration feature on the
through the Unit Configuration Setup Sheet.
features.

50. When all Unit Configuration


features have been recorded
press the EXIT key to return to
the Unit Configuration Setup
Menu.

51. Press the EXIT key again to


return to the Maintenance
Menu.

52. Press the EXIT key again to


return to the Standard Display.

A02A - Page 9 P41RA02A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A02A

Setup Sheet

Hourmeters
Function Default Setting Recorded Setting
Total Hours Actual
Total Run Time Hours Actual
Engine Run Time Hours Actual
Electric Run Time Hours Actual
Zone 1 Run Time Hours Actual
Zone 2 Run Time Hours Actual
Total Run Time Reminder 1 Actual
Total Run Time Reminder 2 Actual
Controller Power On Hours Actual
Pretrip Reminder 100 Hours
Engine Hours Reminder 1 100 Hours
Engine Hours Reminder 2 100 Hours
Electric Hours Reminder 1 100 Hours
Electric Hours Reminder 2 100 Hours

Sensor Calibration Settings


Function Default Setting Recorded Setting
Return Air Sensor Zone 1 5H
Discharge Air Sensor Zone 1 5H
Return Air Sensor Zone 2 5H
Discharge Air Sensor Zone 2 5H
Spare Sensor 5H

P41RA02A - 17 January 2003 A02A - Page 10


Service Procedure A02A

Software Revision
Function Default Setting Recorded Setting
HMI Control Panel Software Revision None
Microprocessor Software Revision None

Set Date and Time


Compare local time to unit time to determine time zone.

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting


Time Zone As specified by customer

Access Code
“1” or as specified by customer

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting


Access Code 1

(Guarded Access) Programmable Features Setup Menu


Function Default Setting Recorded Setting
Temperature Units FAHRENHEIT
Pressure Units PSI
Restarts after Shutdown YES
Setpoint High Limit 80°F
Setpoint Low Limit -20°F
Fuel Saver II NO
High Speed Pull Down YES
Economy Mode DISABLED
Economy Mode Visible YES
Running Fans in Null DISABLED
Door Open DISABLED
Door Action RUNNING IN NULL
Door Open Timer 1 HOUR
High Speed Lockout Key YES

A02A - Page 11 P41RA02A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A02A

Program Hourmeter Submenu


Function Default Setting Recorded Setting
Total Run Time Reminder # 1 100 HOURS
Total Run Time Reminder # 2 100 HOURS
Controller Power On Hours 100 HOURS
Pretrip Reminder Hours 100 HOURS
Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 100 HOURS
Engine Run Time Reminder # 2 100 HOURS
Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 100 HOURS
Electric Run Time Reminder # 2 100 HOURS

Viewable Hourmeter Submenu


Function Default Setting Recorded Setting
Total Hours Viewing
Total Run Hours Viewing
Controller Power On Hours Viewing
Engine Run Time Viewing
Electric Run Time Viewing
Zone 1 Run Time Viewing
Zone 2 Run Time Viewing

Cycle Sentry Setup Menu


Function Default Setting Recorded Setting
Cycle Sentry Amperes Level 5 AMPS
Battery Sentry Voltage Level 12.2 VOLTS

Defrost Setup Menu


Function Default Setting Recorded Setting
Defrost Interval In Range with Fresh Setpoint 6 HOURS
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Fresh Setpoint 4 HOURS
Defrost Interval In Range with Frozen Setpoint 6 HOURS
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Frozen Setpoint 4 HOURS
Maximum Defrost Duration 45 MINUTES

P41RA02A - 17 January 2003 A02A - Page 12


Service Procedure A02A

Language Setup Menu


Function Default Setting Recorded Setting
Default Language ENGLISH
Enable Language English ENABLED
Enable Language Spanish DISABLED
Enable Language French DISABLED
Enable Language German DISABLED
Enable Language Italian DISABLED

Access Code Setup Menu


Function Default Setting Recorded Setting
Enter Access Code 1

Unit Configuration Setup Menu


Function Default Setting Recorded Setting
Compressor Type SCROLL
Number of ETVs (Electronic Throttling Valves) NO ETVS
Electric Standby Equipped YES
Auto Switch Diesel to Electric YES
Auto Switch Electric to Diesel Yes or No NO
Zones 2

A02A - Page 13 P41RA02A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A02A

P41RA02A - 17 January 2003 A02A - Page 14


Service Procedure A03A

A03A

Replacement of the Microprocessor, Interface Board,


Multi-Temperature Option Board or Power Supply Board
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To replace the microprocessor or interface board

Table of Contents
Replacement of the Microprocessor, Interface Board,
Multi-Temperature Option Board or Power Supply Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Important Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Materials Required
• Cable ties

Operation
The microprocessor, interface board, multi-temp option board and power supply board are removed from the
control box as an assembly. They are separated on the bench and the defective component is replaced.

Important Note
• Be sure the harnesses are reconnected properly and do not place excessive strain on the connectors. Secure
the harnesses with cable ties as required.

A03A - Page 1 P41RA03A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A03A

Diagnostic Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1. If possible, log existing This information will be used to


microprocessor setting using set up the replacement
Service Procedure A02A. microprocessor.

2. Turn the unit off. The display should be “dead”.

3. Disconnect standby power, if


connected.

4. Disconnect the unit battery.

5. Disconnect all harness


connectors from the
microprocessor and interface
board assembly.

6. Remove the screws securing


the microprocessor to the
control box and remove the
microprocessor and interface
board assembly from the
control box.

7. Place the microprocessor and


interface board assembly on a
clean bench for further
disassembly.

P41RA03A - 17 January 2003 A03A - Page 2


Service Procedure A03A

Step Action Result Comments

8. To remove the power supply Carefully note board orientation


board from the interface board, and hardware used to mount
remove the two power supply the board.
board screws and pull the
power supply board straight
back from the connectors.

9. To remove the multi-temp Carefully note board orientation


option board from the interface and hardware used to mount
board, disconnect the the board.
interconnect cable. Then
remove the five screws
securing the multi-temp option
board to the interface board.

10. To remove the interface board Carefully note board orientation


from the microprocessor, and hardware used to mount
remove the eight interface the board.
board screws and pull the
interface board straight back
from the microprocessor.

11. Reassemble the components in


the reverse order, using any
replacement parts required. Be
sure to use the correct
hardware, as some screw
lengths may vary.

12. Install the microprocessor and


interface board assembly in the
control box.

A03A - Page 3 P41RA03A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A03A

Step Action Result Comments

13. Reconnect all harness Be sure all connectors are


connectors from the securely mated and secure the
microprocessor and interface harnesses with cable ties as
board assembly. required.

14. Reconnect the standby power if


needed.

15. Reconnect the unit battery.

16. Turn the unit on.

17. Clear any alarm codes as


shown in Section 4.

18. Set up all programmable


features using Service
Procedure A04A.

19. Run a Pretrip Test as shown in


Section 4 to verify proper unit
operation.

P41RA03A - 17 January 2003 A03A - Page 4


Service Procedure A04A

A04A
Microprocessor Setup
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To program sensor grades and programmable features to customer specifications

Table of Contents
Microprocessor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Guarded Access Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Materials Required
• A completed copy of the Setup Sheet at the back of Service Procedure A02A Recording Existing
Microprocessor Settings.

Operation
• The settings of the programmable features must be programmed after replacing a microprocessor or
performing a Cold Start.

• The Guarded Access Menu Overview on the next page may prove helpful.

• See Section 3 for a complete description of programmable features.

• The default settings are shown on the Setup Sheet at the back of Service Procedure A02A Recording Existing
Microprocessor Settings.

• If a sensor grade is not shown on the setup sheet physically check the sensor to determine the grade. It is
important that sensor grades be set properly.

A04A - Page 1 P41RA04A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A04A

Guarded Access Menu Overview

P41RA04A - 17 January 2003 A04A - Page 2


Service Procedure A04A

Procedure
Consult the Programming Menu Overview on the previous page for specific menu information.

Step Action Result Comments

1. Turn the unit on.

2. Press the MENU key. The Operator Menu appears.

3. Press and hold both the EXIT The Maintenance Menu


and unlabeled key for 5 appears.
seconds.

4. Press the NEXT key as The Sensor Calibration Menu


required to display the Sensor appears.
Calibration Menu.

5. When the Sensor Calibration Zone 1 Return Air Sensor If the grade is not shown
Menu is shown press the Grade and the current grade physically check the sensor to
SELECT key to access the appear. Set the grade to the determine the grade. It is
Sensor Calibration Menu. grade on the Setup Sheet and important that sensor grades
confirm by pressing the YES be set properly.
key.

6. Use the NEXT and/or Set the grade of each sensor If the grade is not shown
PREVIOUS keys to scroll as shown on the Setup Sheet. physically check the sensor to
through all sensors. determine the grade. It is
important that sensor grades
be set properly.

7. When all sensor grades have


been recorded press the EXIT
key to return to the
Maintenance Menu.

A04A - Page 3 P41RA04A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Result Comments

8. Press the NEXT key as


required to display the Revision
Menu.

9. Use the NEXT and/or The software revision should


PREVIOUS keys to scroll be the same or later than that
through the HMI Control Panel shown on the Setup Sheet.
and Microprocessor software
revisions.

10. When the software revisions


have been checked press the
EXIT key to return to the
Maintenance Menu.

11. Press the NEXT key as


required to display the Time
and Date Menu.

12. Set the time and date to the Use the time zone shown on See Section 3 for details of
correct time. the Setup Sheet. setting time and date.

13. When the time and date have The NEXT soft key will
been set press the NEXT key disappear and only the
to reach the end of the PREVIOUS key will be shown.
Maintenance Menu.

14. Press and hold both the The Access Code Challenge
EXIT and unlabeled key for appears.
5 seconds.

15. Enter “1” or the required The Programmable Features Most in-service units and all
Access Code as shown on the Menu appears. new microprocessors will be
Setup Sheet. “1”.

P41RA04A - 17 January 2003 A04A - Page 4


Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Result Comments

16. Press the SELECT key to Temperature Units appears.


access the Programmable
Features Setup Menu.

17. Use the NEXT and/or Set all Programmable Features


PREVIOUS keys to scroll to the settings shown on the
through all features in the Setup Sheet.
Programmable Features Setup
Menu.

18. When all Programmable


Features have been set press
the EXIT key to return to the
Programmable Features Setup
Menu.

19. Press the NEXT key to display The Hourmeter Setup Menu
the Hourmeter Setup Menu. appears.

20. When the Hourmeter Setup The Program Hourmeter


Menu is shown press the Submenu appears.
SELECT key to access the
Program Hourmeter Submenu.

21. Press the SELECT key to Total Run Time Reminder #1


access the Program Hourmeter appears.
Submenu.

22. Use the NEXT and/or Set all Program Hourmeter


PREVIOUS keys to scroll Submenu features as shown
through all the Program on the Setup Sheet.
Hourmeter Submenu features.

A04A - Page 5 P41RA04A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Result Comments

23. When all Program Hourmeter The Program Hourmeter


Submenu features have been Submenu appears.
set press the EXIT key to return
to the Program Hourmeter
Submenu.

24. When the Program Hourmeter The Viewable Hourmeter


Submenu is shown press the Submenu appears.
NEXT key to chose the
Viewable Hourmeter Submenu.

25. Press the SELECT key to Total Run Hours Viewing


access the Viewable appears.
Hourmeter Submenu.

26. Use the NEXT and/or Set all Viewable Hourmeter


PREVIOUS keys to scroll Submenu features as shown
through all the Viewable on the Setup Sheet.
Hourmeter Submenu features.

27. When all Viewable Hourmeter The Viewable Hourmeter


Submenu features have been Submenu appears.
set press the EXIT key to return
to the Viewable Hourmeter
Submenu.

28. Press the EXIT key again to The Hourmeter Setup Menu
return to the Hourmeter Setup appears.
Menu.

29. When the Hourmeter Setup The Cycle Sentry Setup Menu
Menu is shown press the NEXT appears.
key to access the Cycle Sentry
Setup Menu.

P41RA04A - 17 January 2003 A04A - Page 6


Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Result Comments

30. When the Cycle Sentry Setup The Cycle Sentry Amps will
Menu is shown press the appear.
SELECT key to access the
Cycle Sentry Setup Menu.

31. Use the NEXT and/or Set each Cycle Sentry feature
PREVIOUS keys to scroll as shown on the Setup Sheet.
through the Cycle Sentry
features.

32. When all Cycle Sentry features


have been set press the EXIT
key to return to the Cycle
Sentry Setup Menu.

33. When the Cycle Sentry Setup


Menu is shown press the NEXT
key to access the Defrost
Setup Menu.

34. When the Defrost Menu is The Defrost Interval In Range -


shown press the SELECT key Fresh Setpoint will appear.
to access the Defrost Setup
Menu.

35. Use the NEXT and/or Set each Defrost feature as


PREVIOUS keys to scroll shown on the Setup Sheet.
through the Defrost features.

36. When all Defrost features have


been set press the EXIT key to
return to the Defrost Setup
Menu.

A04A - Page 7 P41RA04A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Result Comments

37. When the Defrost Setup Menu


is shown press the NEXT key
to access the Language Setup
Menu.

38. When the Language Setup The Default Language will


Menu is shown press the appear.
SELECT key to access the
Language Setup Menu.

39. Use the NEXT and/or Set each Language feature as


PREVIOUS keys to scroll shown on the Setup Sheet.
through the Language features.

40. When all Language features


have been set press the EXIT
key to return to the Language
Setup Menu.

41. When the Language Setup The Access Code Setup Menu
Menu is shown press the will appear.
Select key to access the
Access Code Setup Menu.

42. Set the Access Code as shown


on the Setup Sheet.

43. When the Access Code has


been set press the NEXT key
to access the Unit
Configuration Setup Menu.

P41RA04A - 17 January 2003 A04A - Page 8


Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Result Comments

44. When the Unit Configuration The Compressor Type will


Setup Menu is shown press the appear.
Select key to access the Unit
Configuration Setup Menu.

45. Use the NEXT and/or Set each Unit Configuration


PREVIOUS keys to scroll feature as shown on the Setup
through the Unit Configuration Sheet.
features.

46. When all Unit Configuration


features have been set press
the EXIT key to return to the
Unit Configuration Setup Menu.

47. Press the EXIT key again to


return to the Maintenance
Menu.

48. Press the EXIT key again to


return to the Standard Display.

A04A - Page 9 P41RA04A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A07A

A07A
Performing a Cold Start

Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
A Cold Start is a special procedure to be used to reset a microprocessor to the standard (default) settings. This
procedure should only be used when specifically required.

Table of Contents
Performing a Cold Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Important Notes
• All programmable features such as sensor calibration, defrost settings and feature settings will be returned to
the standard (default) settings. They must be set up using Service Procedure A04A after performing a Cold
Start or the unit may not operate to the customer’s requirements.

• Hourmeters will not be reset.

A07A - Page 1 P41RA07A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A07A

X2 Jumper in Cold
Start Position

Interface Board with X2 Jumper in Cold Start Position

P41RA07A - 17 January 2003 A07A - Page 2


Service Procedure A07A

Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1. Log existing microprocessor This information will be used to If the information can not be
settings using Service set up the microprocessor after retrieved, the customer
Procedure A02A. performing the Cold Start. specified settings must be
used.

2. Download the maintenance


data logger.

3. Press the unit Off key and turn The display must be blank.
off the microprocessor On/Off
switch.

4. Locate the jumpers on the They are located just above See the illustration on the
interface board. plug P17 at the lower center of previous page.
the interface board.

5. Remove the upper X2 jumper


from the center pin and the
right side pin, and place it over
the center pin and the left side
pin.

6. Turn on the microprocessor The display screen will turn on This performs the Cold Start.
On/Off switch and press the and the Alarm message will
unit On key. appear.

7. Go to the Alarm Menu and Alarm Code 74 must be present Other alarms may also be
scroll through the alarms. indicating a successful Cold present. This is normal. If Alarm
Start has been performed. Code 74 is not present the Cold
Start was not successful and
steps 3 through 6 must be
repeated.

A07A - Page 3 P41RA07A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A07A

Step Action Result Comments

8. Press the unit Off key and turn


off the microprocessor On/Off
switch.

9. Remove the upper X2 jumper


from the center pin and the left
side pin, and place it over the
center pin and the right side
pin.

10. Turn on the microprocessor


On/Off switch and press the
unit On key.

11. Go to the Alarm Menu and Code 74 can not be cleared in


clear the alarm codes. the conventional manner. It
must be cleared using Service
Procedure A04A.

12. Set up all programmable NOTE: All programmable


features using Service microprocessor functions
Procedure A04A. except the hourmeters will be
returned to the standard
(default) settings. They must
be set up using Service
Procedure A04A after
performing a Cold Start.

13. Send a Start of Trip to the Data


Logger (DAS if equipped).

P41RA07A - 17 January 2003 A07A - Page 4


Service Procedure A15A

A15A
Temperature Sensor Grade Calibration
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To calibrate the sensor grades of replacement Return Air Sensors and Discharge Air Sensors

Table of Contents
Temperture Sensor Grade Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Important Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Materials Required
• None

Operation
The return air temperature sensor and discharge air temperature sensors are graded sensors. Any time these
sensors are replaced the grade of the new sensor must be correctly entered to insure optimum performance of
the unit. The sensor grade is stamped on the barrel of each replacement sensor.

Important Note
• Always record the sensor grade of any replacement return or discharge temperature sensors. The grade is
required to complete the sensor calibration procedure.

A15A - Page 1 P41RA15A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A15A

Diagnostic Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1. Verify the sensor grades by


physically checking the
sensors. Record the grades of
the Return Air and/or
Discharge sensors.

2. Turn the unit on.

3. Press the MENU key. The Operator Menu appears.

4. Press and hold both the EXIT The Maintenance Menu


and unlabeled key for 5 appears.
seconds.

5. Press the NEXT key as The Sensor Calibration Menu


required to display the Sensor appears.
Calibration Menu.

6. When the Sensor Calibration Zone 1 Return Air Sensor


key is shown press the Grade and the current grade
SELECT key to access the appear.
Sensor Calibration Menu.

7. Use the NEXT and/or These keys scroll through all Be sure the correct zone is
PREVIOUS keys to select the graded sensors installed on the selected.
sensor to be calibrated. unit.

8. When the sensor to be The Sensor Change menu for


calibrated is shown on the the selected sensor will appear.
display, press the SELECT key.

P41RA15A - 17 January 2003 A15A - Page 2


Service Procedure A15A

Step Action Result Comments

9. Use the “+” and “-“ keys to


change the sensor grade to
match the grade stamped on
the sensor.

10. When the correct grade is


shown press the YES key to
confirm the choice.

11. If necessary, repeat steps 7 –


10 to change any other sensor
grades that are not correct.

12. When finished, press the EXIT


key or turn the unit off to exit
the Sensor Calibration Menu.

13. Record the new sensor(s) Be sure the information is


grade on the Sensor correct.
Calibration and Access
Parameter Nameplate.

A15A - Page 3 P41RA15A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A21A

A21A
Download Data Logger and Display Data
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
Download data logger and display data for the Thermo King SPECTRUM microprocessor using a computer and
Wintrac 4.2 or later software.

Table of Contents
Download Data Logger and Display Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Connecting the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Materials Required
The following materials are required to perform a flash load.

• Thermo King Wintrac 4.2 or later software loaded on a PC computer.

• Interconnect Cable, Thermo King Service Part Number TK 44-9417 (20 foot, 6 meter) or TK 44-9418 (50 foot,
15 meter).

• Adapter Cable 1E05179G01, 15 Pin “D” connector to 12 pin Mini-Mate.

A21A - Page 1 P41RA21A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A21A

Connecting the Cables


The same cables used for downloading are required to perform a flash load. Typically two cables are used to
connect the computer to the microprocessor as shown below.

Data Cable: The data cable has a 9 pin “D” connector installed on one end to attach to the computer and a 15
pin “D” connector on the other end. The cable is available as either a 20 foot or 50 foot cable as shown below.

Data Cable

20 feet (6 meters) TK 44-9417


50 feet (15 meters) TK 44-9418

Adapter Cable: An adapter cable is required to complete the connection to the microprocessor or data logger.
This cable has a 15 pin “D” connector on one end and a 12 pin Mini-Mate connector on the other end. The 15 pin
“D” connector is attached to the 15 pin “D” connector on the data cable and the 12 pin Mini-Mate connector is
attached to connector P17 on the Interface Board. If another harness is connected at the P17 connector it must
be disconnected to perform the flash load.

Adapter Cable

1 foot (0.3 meters) TK 204-1093

P41RA21A - 17 January 2003 A21A - Page 2


Service Procedure A21A

Procedure
The following procedure should be followed to download the data logger using a direct connection to the
microprocessor. Consult the Wintrac Operating Manual that is included with the software for a full description of
the use of the Wintrac software.

Step Action Result Comments

1. Connect the data cables from


the PC to the unit as described
above.

2. Connect a power source to the Do not rely on a laptop battery


PC computer. as low power may cause
communications to be lost and
the download to fail.

3. Start Wintrac 4.2 or later as Consult the Wintrac Operating


shown in the Wintrac Operating Manual that is included with the
Manual. Wintrac software.

4. Turn the unit on. The unit must remain on and


connections must not be
disturbed during the download
process.

5. Follow the instructions in the Consult the Wintrac Operating


Wintrac Operating Manual to Manual that is included with the
download the data logger and Wintrac software.
display the data.

A21A - Page 3 P41RA21A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A26A

A26A
Welding on Units Equipped with SPECTRUM Microprocessors
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To prevent damage to the microprocessor during welding operations

Table of Contents
Welding on Units Equipped with SPECTRUM Microprocessors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Before Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
After Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Materials Required
• None

Operation
Electric welding generates extremely high amperage currents which can damage electrical and electronic
components. In order to minimize the possibility of damage the following procedures must be followed.

A26A - Page 1 P41RA26A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A26A

Before Welding
Step Action Result Comments

1. Turn the unit off.

2. Disconnect standby power, if


connected.

3. Remove both the battery


cables.

4. Connect the welder ground


cable as close as possible to
the area where the welding is
to be performed. Move the
welder ground cable as
required.

After Welding
Step Action Result Comments

1. Reconnect the battery cables.

2. Reconnect the standby power if


needed.

3. Perform a Pretrip Test as


shown in Section 4 to confirm
operation.

P41RA26A - 17 January 2003 A26A - Page 2


Service Procedure A46A

A46A
Flash Loading Microprocessor Software
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To change or update software for the Thermo King SPECTRUM microprocessor using a computer and Wintrac
4.2 or later software.

Table of Contents
Flash Loading Microprocessor Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Obtaining Flash Load Files and Preparing Them for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Preparing Flash Load Files for Use by Wintrac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Connecting the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Flash Load Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Flash Load Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Materials Required
The following materials are required to perform a flash load.

• Thermo King Wintrac 4.2 or later software loaded on a PC computer.

• Interconnect Cable, Thermo King Service Part Number TK 44-9417 (20 foot, 6 meter) or TK 44-9418 (50 foot,
15 meter).

• Adapter Cable TK 204-1093, 15 Pin “D” connector to 12 pin Mini-Mate.

• The correct version Flash Load file.

A46A - Page 1 P41RA46A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A46A

Obtaining Flash Load Files and Preparing Them for Use


A file containing the new software is required in order to perform a flash load. These files are supplied in the
following format:

SPECTRUM-xxxx.exe where xxxx = software version

Software flash load files can be obtained in a number of different ways.

• The Thermo King web site www.thermoking.com/.

• An attachment to a Lotus Notes message.

• An attachment to an e-mail message.

• On a floppy disk.

Create a sub-directory and detach or download the necessary file or files. The files must then be prepared for
use.

Preparing Flash Load Files for Use by Wintrac


Flash load files must be prepared for use before the Wintrac flash load process can be started. To prepare the
files proceed as follows:

1. Using Windows Explorer locate the sub-directory containing the files. The files will be in the format
SPECTRUM-xxxx.exe where xxxx = the software revision.

2. Double click the desired file. The file will be uncompressed and installed in the sub-directory
Wintrac\Flashload\yyyy where the yyyy sub-directory is named after the device the software is for
(SPECTRUM). If this directory does not exist it will be created automatically. There will be three files in this
sub-directory.

The software files are now ready for flash loading using Wintrac.

P41RA46A - 17 January 2003 A46A - Page 2


Service Procedure A46A

Connecting the Cables


The same cables used for downloading are required to perform a flash load. Typically two cables are used to
connect the computer to the microprocessor as shown below.

Data Cable: The data cable has a 9 pin “D” connector installed on one end to attach to the computer and a 15
pin “D” connector on the other end. The cable is available as either a 20 foot or 50 foot cable as shown below.

Data Cable

20 feet (6 meters) TK 44-9417


50 feet (15 meters) TK 44-9418

Adapter Cable: An adapter cable is required to complete the connection to the microprocessor or data logger.
This cable has a 15 pin “D” connector on one end and a 12 pin Mini-Mate connector on the other end. The 15 pin
“D” connector is attached to the 15 pin “D” connector on the data cable and the 12 pin Mini-Mate connector is
attached to connector P17 on the Interface Board. If another harness is connected at the P17 connector it must
be disconnected to perform the flash load.

Adapter Cable

1 foot (0.3 meters) TK 204-1093

Flash Load Recovery


If the power or data connections are disturbed during flash load, the microprocessor will "freeze" in flash load
mode. The display will show [FLASH] and the microprocessor will not function. This occurs since only partial
software exists in the microprocessor's memory and it is no longer able to communicate. The HMI Control Panel
will display the message LOST COMMUNICATIONS.

If this happens, retry the flash load procedure several times as shown below. If prompts appear always select the
prompt that allows the flash load to proceed. Replacement of the microprocessor may be necessary if
communications cannot be re-established.

A46A - Page 3 P41RA46A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A46A

Flash Load Procedure


The following procedure should be followed to flash load software using a direct connection to the
microprocessor.

Step Action Result Comments

1. Obtain and prepare the flash


load files as described above.

2. Connect the data cables from


the PC to the unit as described
above.

3. Connect a power source to the Do not rely on a laptop


PC computer. battery as low power may
cause communications to be
lost and the flash load to fail.
See Flash Load Recovery on
the previous page.

4. Start Wintrac 4.2 or later as


shown in the Wintrac manual.

5. Turn the unit on. The unit must remain on and


connections must not be
disturbed during the flash
load process. See Flash Load
Recovery on previous page if
the process is interrupted.

6. Log all existing microprocessor This information will be used to


settings using Service set up the new software.
Procedure A02A.

P41RA46A - 17 January 2003 A46A - Page 4


Service Procedure A46A

Step Action Result Comments

7. If the Wintrac menu bar does The TOOLS menu will appear If the Tools menu does not
not show TOOLS, press and in the Wintrac menu bar. appear the Wintrac User
hold the computers “Ctrl” and Access Level must be changed
“Shift” keys and then press the as shown by the readme.txt file
“T” key. supplied with Wintrac.

8. Left click “Tools”. The TOOLS menu will appear.

9. From the Tools menu left click A download data warning menu
“Flash Load”. appears.

10. Left click “Yes” to continue. A directory containing the flash


load files appears.

11. Double click the flash load


directory and locate the correct
flash load file.

12. Double click the flash load file A confirmation message will
appear.

13. If the information shown is The flash load will proceed The unit must remain on and
correct, left click “Yes” to automatically. A flash load connections must not be
continue. confirmation will appear in the disturbed during the flash
device display screen. The load process. See Flash Load
flash load will take several Recovery on previous page if
minutes. the process is interrupted.

14. When the flash load is


complete a message appears
confirming a successful flash
load.

A46A - Page 5 P41RA46A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A46A

Step Action Result Comments

15. Left click “OK” to complete the


flash load.

16. Set up the Clock/Calendar as


shown in Section 4.

17. Clear any alarm codes using


the Code and Clear keys.

18. Set up all programmable


features using Service
Procedure A04A.

19. Turn off the unit and cycle the This loads all changes to the
Unit Power Switch off and back HMI Control Panel.
on. Restart the unit.

20. Run a Full Pretrip as shown in This confirms proper unit


Section 4. operation.

P41RA46A - 17 January 2003 A46A - Page 6


Service Procedure A48A

A48A
Phase Detect Module Operation and Diagnostics
Where Used

All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units equipped with electric standby

Purpose

To understand phase detect module operation and diagnostic procedures

Table of Contents
Phase Detect Module Operation and Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Description

The phase detect module is designed to monitor both single and 3 phase voltages from 160 volts AC through 510
volts AC.

A48A - Page 1 P41RA48A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A48A

Operation

The brown, blue and black wires are used to sample the power at L1, L2 and L3 respectively. Operating power
from 12 Vdc is supplied to the module via the 8F-01 wire and CHP-01 wire.

When the voltage sensed rises above 180 volts AC and all three phases are present, the module ER-01 wire will
output 12 Vdc after the conditions exist for 2 to 4 seconds. This signal informs the microprocessor that electric
standby operation is possible. If the voltage drops below 160 volts AC or a phase is lost, the output is turned off
after the condition exists for 8 to 10 seconds. The module continues to monitor the power and will again output
12 Vdc within 2 to 4 seconds after the voltage rises above 180 volts AC and all three phases are present.

If phase rotation is L1, L2, L3 the 7EB-01 wire will supply 12 Vdc to energize the appropriate phase rotation
contactor. If phase rotation is L1, L3, L2 the 7EC-01 wire will supply 12 Vdc to energize the appropriate phase
rotation contactor. The 7EB-01 and 7EC-01 wires are interlocked to prevent both phase contactors from being
energized at once.

Connections

Connections to the module are shown in the tables below.

Power Connections

Input Description

8F-01 Supplies nominal 12 volt DC power to the phase detect module.

CHP-01 Chassis ground

Inputs

Input Description

L1 This brown wire supplies standby power L1 to the phase detect module.

L2 This blue wire supplies standby power L2 to the phase detect module.

L3 This black wire supplies standby power L3 to the phase detect module.

P41RA48A - 17 January 2003 A48A - Page 2


Service Procedure A48A

Outputs

Output Description

7EH-01 With 12 Vdc supplied, then outputs 7EB-01 or 7EC-01 will be at 12 Vdc.

7EB-01 If phase rotation is L1, L2, L3 then this wire will provide 12 Vdc to energize the appropriate phase
rotation contactor. The 7EC-01 wire is interlocked to prevent both phase contactors from being
energized at once.

7EC-01 If phase rotation is L1, L3, L2 then this wire will provide 12 Vdc to energize the appropriate phase
rotation contactor. The 7EB-01 wire is interlocked to prevent both phase contactors from being
energized at once.

ER-01 This wire will output 12 Vdc 2 to 4 seconds after the voltage rises above 180 volts AC and all three
phases are present. If the voltage drops below 160 volts AC or a phase is lost and the condition
remains for 8 to 10 seconds, the output is turned off. The module continues to monitor and will
again output 12 Vdc 2 to 4 seconds after the power returns to normal (voltage rises above 180
volts AC and all three phases are present).

Connector Pinout

Pin Wire Description

1 8F-01 Power to Module

2 CHP-01 Chassis ground

3 ER-01 AC Power OK

4 7EH-01 Switches the 7EC and 7EB from grounding to power logic

5 7EB-01 Phase L1-L2-L3

6 7EC-01 Phase L1-L3-L2

7 Unused

8 Unused

9 Unused

A48A - Page 3 P41RA48A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure A48A

Removal and Replacement

1. Turn the unit off.

2. Disconnect the unit battery.

3. Disconnect the standby power.

4. Remove the high voltage cover.

5. Disconnect the three wires from the phase detect module at the motor contactor.

6. Unplug the phase detect module harness.

7. Remove the old phase detect module.

8. Install the new phase detect module.

9. Connect the new phase detect module wires to the upper contactor as follows:

10. Connect the brown wire to L1 on the contactor.

11. Connect the blue wire to L2 on the contactor.

12. Connect the black wire to L3 on the contactor.

13. Use crimp-on terminals as required.

14. Connect the plug on the short harness from the phase detect module.

15. Install the high voltage cover.

16. Secure wires and wire harnesses as required using cable ties.

17. Connect the unit battery.

18. Connect standby power.

19. Perform a Pretrip Test to verify proper operation.

P41RA48A - 17 January 2003 A48A - Page 4


Service Procedure A48A

Diagnostics

Step Action Result Comments

1. Plug the standby power cord


into a known good power
supply and turn the unit on.
(Set zone thermostats to -20 F
[-29 C].)

2. Using a Fluke Meter, test the The voltage should be between


L1, L2, and L3 circuits at the 200 - 500 VAC between
input to the terminals where the circuits. If not, repair as
Brown, Blue and Black wires necessary to supply the
are connected. needed voltage to the unit.

3. Check the 8F and CHP circuits If this power is not present,


to the phase detect module. check the 8 circuit from the
12 Vdc must be present from On/Off switch.
8F to CHP.

4. If correct power is present in If power is not present replace Removal and replacement of
the tests above then the ER the phase detect module. the phase detect module is
circuit on the interface board detailed on a previous page.
should have 12 Vdc present.

5. If LED 6 on the interface board If power is not present check


is on then the 7EH circuit the Diesel/Electric Relay circuit
should have 12 Vdc present. on the interface board.

6. If the unit is calling for If neither contactor is energized Removal and replacement of
operation (LED 6 is on) one of check for 12 Vdc on 7EC or the phase detect module is
the phase select contactors 7EB. If voltage is not present detailed on a previous page.
should be energized. replace the phase detect
module.

A48A - Page 5 P41RA48A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure D01A

D01A
Temperature Sensor Test
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To confirm the proper operation of the unit temperature sensors

Table of Contents
Temperature Sensor Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Diagnostic Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Materials Required
• Fluke Digital Multimeter.

Operation
Both graded and ungraded sensors are used on SPECTRUM Multi-temp applications. Graded sensors are used
to sense return air and discharge air temperature. Ungraded sensors are used to sense coil and ambient air
temperature. Both graded and ungraded sensors are checked in the same manner.

D01A - Page 1 P41RD01A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure D01A

Diagnostic Procedure

Step Action Result Comments

1. Note: Polarity must be


considered when connecting
temperature sensors. If the
sensors are connected
backwards, the display will
show dashes (----). Consult the
schematic diagram or wiring
diagram for the correct
connections.

2. Turn the unit off.

3. Disconnect the sensor at the


plug next to the sensor.

4. Turn the unit on. The Standard Display will


appear.

5. Access the Gauge submenu in The display for the If all the temperature sensors
the Maintenance Menu and disconnected sensor should show dashes [----] without
display the disconnected show dashes [----]. being disconnected, the
sensor. microprocessor is defective.

6. Using a high quality meter The voltage must be from 4.90


check the voltage at the sensor to 5.10 Vdc.
plug on the harness.

7. If the voltage at the harness If there are no broken wires or


connector is correct, pushed pins in the plug,
disassemble and check the replace the sensor.
sensor plug.

P41RD01A - 17 January 2003 D01A - Page 2


Service Procedure D01A

Step Action Result Comments

8. If the voltage measured in Step The voltage must be from 4.90 See Wiring Diagram for pin
6 above is incorrect, recheck to 5.10 Vdc. numbers.
the voltage in the same circuit
of the J3 connector on the
microprocessor.

9. If the voltage is correct at Step Repair the harness as required.


8 and incorrect at Step 6, the
problem is in the wiring
harness.

10. If the voltage is incorrect in Replace the microprocessor.


both Steps 6 and 8, the
problem is in the
microprocessor.

D01A - Page 3 P41RD01A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure D03A

D03A
Pressure Sensor Test
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To confirm the proper operation of the suction or discharge pressure sensors

Table of Contents
Pressure SensorTest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Materials Required
• Fluke Digital Multimeter.

D03A - Page 1 P41RD03A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure D03A

Diagnostic Procedure

Step Action Result Comments

1. Turn the unit on.

2. Access the Gauge submenu in The display should show the Confirm reading with
the Maintenance Menu and pressure reading for the refrigeration gauges as
display the suction pressure or sensor. If the sensor reading is necessary. If all sensors show
discharge pressure. obviously incorrect or the dashes [----] without being
display shows [----], proceed as disconnected, the
shown below. microprocessor is defective.

3. Turn the unit off and disconnect


the suction or discharge
pressure transducer at the
transducer plug.

4. Turn the unit on.

5. Check the voltage at the sensor The voltage between wires


harness connector. DPN and DPP (Discharge
Pressure) or SPN and SPP
(Suction Pressure) must be
from 4.90 to 5.10 Vdc. check
the microprocessor using
Service Procedure A01A.

6. Check harness continuity of the


DP or SP wire.

P41RD03A - 17 January 2003 D03A - Page 2


Service Procedure D03A

Step Action Result Comments

7. If the voltage at Step 5 is


present and the DP or SP wire
has continuity replace the
sensor in question.

8. If the voltage at Step 5 is not If the harness is good, replace


present, check the continuity of the microprocessor.
harness wire DPN, DPP, SPN
and/or SPP.

D03A - Page 3 P41RD03A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure F01A

F01A
Checking and Replacing the Oil Level Switch
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To test the oil level switch for proper operation

Table of Contents
Checking and Replacing the Oil Level Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Replacing the Switch—Press In Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Replacing the Switch—Screw In Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Materials Required
• Fluke Digital Multimeter.

Operation
The switch is open with the float up (indicating full oil level). The switch is closed with the float down (indicating
low oil level). Disconnecting the switch will disable the circuit and prevent Alarm Code 66.

F01A - Page 1 P41RF01A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure F01A

Diagnostic Procedure

Step Action Result Comments

1. Turn the unit off.

2. Disconnect the Deutsch The oil level switch is located


connector at the switch. on the top of the oil pan.

3. Use an ohmmeter to check With the oil above the "add" This check can be performed
switch continuity. mark, the switch should be while changing oil.
open.

If the engine is 6 or more quarts


(5.7 or more liters) low the
switch should be closed.

4. Reconnect the Deutsch


connector.

Replacing the Switch – Press In Applications

Step Action Result Comments

1. Turn the unit off.

2. Disconnect the Deutsch The oil level switch is located


connector at the switch. on the top of the oil pan.

3. Carefully pry the switch up


using a screwdriver and light
hand pressure. Twist and rock
the switch as necessary to
release it from the rubber seal.

P41RF01A - 17 January 2003 F01A - Page 2


Service Procedure F01A

Step Action Result Comments

4. Remove the old switch seal


from the mounting hole.

5. Remove the rubber seal from CAUTION: Do not attempt to


the replacement switch and install the switch and seal at
insert it lip up in the opening in the same time. The seal
the oil pan. must be installed first. When
the switch is installed it
expands the seal to create a
leak proof installation.

6. Lightly oil the seal to aid in


installing the switch and press
the switch into place using
hand pressure only.

7. Reconnect the Deutsch switch


connector.

F01A - Page 3 P41RF01A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure F01A

Replacing the Switch – Screw In Applications

Step Action Result Comments

1. Turn the unit off.

2. Disconnect the Deutsch The oil level switch is located


connector at the switch. on the top of the oil pan.

3. Unscrew and remove the old


switch.

4. Apply Teflon tape to the threads


on the new switch.

5. Screw the new switch into the


hole in the oil pan.

6. Tighten until snug. Do not


over-tighten or the switch may
be damaged.

7. Reconnect the Deutsch switch


connector.

P41RF01A - 17 January 2003 F01A - Page 4


Service Procedure F05A

F05A
Checking the Oil Pressure Switch
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To test the oil pressure shutdown switch for proper operation.

Table of Contents
Checking the Oil Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Materials Required
• Fluke Digital Multimeter.

F05A - Page 1 P41RF05A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure F05A

Diagnostic Procedure

Step Action Result Comments

1. Connect a multimeter set for


DC Volts between the 20B wire
at the oil pressure shutdown
switch and chassis ground.

2. Turn the unit on and observe The voltage with the unit on
the meter reading. and the engine not running
should be 0. If there is voltage
present the switch is defective.

3. Start the engine and observe Battery voltage should be


the meter reading. present when the engine is
running. If the voltage is low or
is 0, proceed to Step 4.

4. With the unit running, If the battery voltage is present The oil pressure switch should
disconnect the 20B wire from on the wire, the switch is be installed horizontally to
the switch. Measure the defective and should be minimize water penetration.
voltage from the 20B wire to replaced.
chassis ground.

If the voltage on the 20B wire is Check the 20B circuit as


low or 0, there is a problem in required to determine the
the 20B circuit. cause.

P41RF05A - 17 January 2003 F05A - Page 2


Service Procedure F07A

F07A
Coolant Level Sensor Test
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To confirm proper operation of the coolant level sensor.

Table of Contents
Coolant Level Sensor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Materials Required
• Fluke Digital Multimeter.

Operation
An optical sensor is used to determine the coolant level. This three wire sensor is supplied with +5 Vdc from the
microprocessor.

F07A - Page 1 P41RF07A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure F07A

Diagnostic Procedure

Step Action Result Comments

1. Check the voltage between the + 5 Vdc should be present


red and black wires at the between the red and black
sensor harness connector for + wires. If not, check the harness
5 Vdc. and connectors as required to
determine the cause.

2. If + 5 Vdc is present at the Less than 0.5 Vdc should be


sensor, check the voltage on present when the sensor is not
the white wire at the sensor immersed in coolant and
harness connector. +5 Vdc should be present when
the sensor is submersed in
coolant. If these voltages are
not present the senor must be
replaced.

P41RF07A - 17 January 2003 F07A - Page 2


Service Procedure F08A

F08A
Coolant Temperature Sensor Test
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To test the coolant temperature sensor for proper operation.

Table of Contents
Coolant Temperature Sensor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Coolant Temperature Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Materials Required
• Fluke Digital Multimeter.

Coolant Temperature Sensor

F08A - Page 1 P41RF08A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure F08A

Diagnostic Procedure

Step Action Result Comments

1. Note: Polarity must be


considered when connecting
temperature sensors. If the
sensors are connected
backwards, the display will
show dashes (----). Consult the
schematic diagram or wiring
diagram for the correct
connections.

2. Turn the unit off.

3. Disconnect the sensor at the


plug next to the sensor.

4. Turn the unit on. The Standard Display will


appear.

5. Access the Gauge submenu in The display for the Engine If all the temperature sensors
the Maintenance Menu and Coolant Temperature sensor show dashes [----] without
display Engine Coolant should show dashes [----]. being disconnected, the
Temperature. microprocessor is defective.

6. Using a high quality meter The voltage must be from 4.90


check the voltage at the sensor to 5.10 Vdc.
plug on the harness.

7. If the voltage at the harness If there are no broken wires or


connector is correct, pushed pins in the plug,
disassemble and check the replace the sensor.
coolant sensor plug.

P41RF08A - 17 January 2003 F08A - Page 2


Service Procedure F08A

Step Action Result Comments

8. If the voltage measured in Step The voltage must be from 4.90


6 above is incorrect, recheck to 5.10 Vdc.
the voltage in the same circuit
at pins 15 and 26 of the J3
connector on the
microprocessor.

9. If the voltage is correct at Step Repair the harness as required.


8 and incorrect at Step 6, the
problem is in the wiring
harness.

10. If the voltage is incorrect in Replace the microprocessor.


both Steps 6 and 8, the
problem is in the
microprocessor.

F08A - Page 3 P41RF08A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure F09A

F09A
RPM Sensor Test and Adjustment
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To test and adjust the RPM sensor.

Table of Contents
RPM Sensor Test and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Materials Required
• Fluke Digital Multimeter.

Operation
The RPM sensor rarely fails but may require adjustment for proper operation.

F09A - Page 1 P41RF09A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure F09A

Diagnostic Procedure

Step Action Result Comments

1. Turn the unit off.

2. Remove the FS1 and FS2


wires from the sensor.

3. Check the sensor resistance The sensor resistance should


using a high quality multimeter. be 250 to 300 ohms with the
wires removed. If not, the
sensor should be replaced.

4. Loosen the lock nut, turn the


sensor in until it contacts the
ring gear on the flywheel, then
back it out ½ turn and tighten
the lock nut.

5. Reattach the FS1 and FS2 Polarity is not important.


wires to the sensor.

6. Start the unit.

7. Access the Gauge submenu in The display should show the


the Maintenance Menu and engine RPM.
display Engine RPM.

8. If the RPM reading does not


appear in the display, remove
the FS1 and FS2 wires from
the sensor.

P41RF09A - 17 January 2003 F09A - Page 2


Service Procedure F09A

Step Action Result Comments

9. Using Service Test Mode, place For information on Service Test


the unit in high speed cool Mode see Section 4.
[HSC].

10. Check the voltage across the The voltage in high speed Set the meter to read AC volts.
sensor terminals with the FS1 should read from 1.0 to 5.0
and FS2 wires removed. volts ac.

11. If the required voltage is not


present, replace the RPM
sensor. If the required voltage
is present, check the harness
wires and repair as required.

12. Reattach the FS1 and FS2 Polarity is not important.


wires to the sensor.

F09A - Page 3 P41RF09A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure H04A

H04A
Wiring Harness Continuity Test
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To illustrate the correct procedures for checking harness continuity on equipment utilizing solid state devices

Table of Contents
Wiring Harness Continuity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Where Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Materials Required
• Fluke Digital Multimeter.

• Jumper Wires as Required

Important Notes
• Do not use battery and light test tools to check continuity.

• Do not check to see if a circuit is energized by tapping a circuit wire to ground and watching for a spark.

H04A - Page 1 P41RH04A - 17 January 2003


Service Procedure H04A

Diagnostic Procedure

Step Action Result Comments

1. Do not use battery and light Using such devices may


test tools to check continuity. present excessive voltage or
current to solid state devices. In
many cases the device will be
damaged or destroyed.

2. Use a high quality digital Older analog (needle type


multimeter or an analog meter meter movement) meters and
with high input impedance. some inexpensive “mechanic
tool box” meters present a
large load to the circuit being
tested. This can significantly
alter the meter reading,
especially when measuring
small voltages or currents.

3. Never test a circuit to see if it is This will damage solid state


energized by tapping the circuit components or blow a fuse.
wire to ground and watching for
a spark.

4. Locate the suspect circuit on


the appropriate wiring diagram.

P41RH04A - 17 January 2003 H04A - Page 2


Service Procedure H04A

Step Action Result Comments

5. Isolate both ends of the circuit Harness connections are


using the following methods as identified in the Service
required. Procedures appropriate to the
device in question. They may
• Disconnect the appropriate also be determined by
connector at the
microprocessor. consulting the wiring diagrams.

CAUTION: Failure to isolate


• Disconnect the device
connector at the device. both ends may cause
misleading results.
• Disconnect the appropriate
connector at the relay board.

• Remove the wire from the


device terminal.

6. Using jumpers as required, The meter must show a very Be certain the ohmmeter
connect each end of the circuit low resistance (less than 1.0 battery is good and the meter
to a high quality multimeter. ohm), indicating circuit zeros with the leads held
continuity. If not, the circuit is together to prevent misleading
open or has excessive results.
resistance. Troubleshoot the
circuit to determine the cause
using the wiring diagrams.

7. After determining that the The meter should indicate an


circuit passes a continuity test, open circuit. If not, the circuit is
remove one lead and connect it shorted to ground.
to chassis ground to check for Trouble-shoot the circuit to
a short to ground. determine the cause using the
wiring diagrams.

H04A - Page 3 P41RH04A - 17 January 2003


Section 7—SPECTRUM Information

Software Features and Interchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1


SPECTRUM Microprocessor Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
SPECTRUM HMI Control Panel Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
Microprocessor Features and Interchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
SPECTRUM Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
SPECTRUM HMI Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
SPECTRUM Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Option Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
SPECTRUM Power Supply Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Section 7—SPECTRUM Information
Software Features and Interchange
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Microprocessors with Revision 25xx Software
To identify the software revision, see Section 4 Checking Software Revision.
CAUTION: The software on a “used” microprocessor should always be checked as the software
may have been changed and therefore different from that shown on the label.

SPECTRUM Microprocessor Software


Software Revision Features Interchange with:

95xx Pre-production releases Upgrade to 2500

2500 Production release Replaces all 95XX

SPECTRUM HMI Control Panel Software


Software Revision Features Interchange with:

A0xx Pre-production releases Upgrade to 6500

6500 Production release Replaces all A0xx

17 January 2003 7-1


Section 7—SPECTRUM Information

7-2 17 January 2003


Section 7—SPECTRUM Information

Microprocessor Features and Interchange


Where Used
All Thermo King SPECTRUM Microprocessors

SPECTRUM Microprocessor
Engineering Service Parts
Features Where Used Interchange With
Number Number

5D55341G01 Production units SPECTRUM truck units 45-1951

SPECTRUM HMI Control Panel


Engineering Service Parts
Features Where Used Interchange With
Number Number

2C44130G01 Production units SPECTRUM truck units 41-4150

SPECTRUM Interface Board


Engineering Service Parts
Features Where Used Interchange With
Number Number

5D55077G01 Production units SPECTRUM truck units 41-4098

SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Option Board


Engineering Service Parts
Features Where Used Interchange With
Number Number

2C43668G01 Production units SPECTRUM truck units 41-4097

SPECTRUM Power Supply Board


Engineering Service Parts
Features Where Used Interchange With
Number Number

5D50930G01 Production units SPECTRUM truck units 41-4096

17 January 2003 7-3


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration
Procedures
SPECTRUM TS Refrigeration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
SPECTRUM Refrigeration System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
SPECTRUM Unit Solenoids and Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Purge Valve (PV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Liquid Injection Valve (LIV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Hot Gas Bypass Valve (HGB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Discharge Pressure Regulator (DPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Zone Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Suction Line Solenoid (SLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Transducers & Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Discharge Pressure Transducer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Suction Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
High Pressure Cutout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
All Zones Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
One Zone Cooling One Zone Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
All Zones Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Any Zone Defrosting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Operation of Multi-Temperature Unit Solenoids and Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Transducer Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Purge Valve Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
High Speed Solenoid (Any Zone Heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Invertible (Reverse Cycle Heat) Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Condenser Inlet Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
(R01A) System Evacuation, Charging and Checking Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Evacuating the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Charging the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Checking the Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
(R02A) Low Side Pumpdown Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
(R03A) Hot Gas Solenoid Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
(R04A) Liquid Line Solenoid & Liquid Return Check Valve Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
(R06A) Suction Line Check Valve Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
(R07A) Purge Valve Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
(R08A) Condenser Inlet Solenoid, Receiver Tank Check Valve & Purge Check Valve Test . . .8-37
(R09A) Service Pumpdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41
(R10A) SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Refrigerant Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43
Recovering Refrigerant from Unit with Operating Compressor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43
Recovering Refrigerant from Unit with Failed Compressor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
(R12A) Hot Gas Bypass Valve Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45
(R13A) Liquid Injection Valve Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47
Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Diagnostic Data Collection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-50


Diagnostic Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-50
Completing the Data Collection Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-51
SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Unit Data Collection Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-52
Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration
Procedures
SPECTRUM TS Refrigeration System
18 15
19
30 28 8 9
20
16 6
22
7 10
29 27
21
26
32

17 33
24 25 2
23 1
12
31
3

5
4

11 AJA1279
34
14
13

1. Scroll Compressor 18. Evaporator Coil


2. Thermister 19. Liquid Line Solenoid
3. Compressor Oil Sight Glass 20. Liquid Return Check Valve
4. Liquid Injection Solenoid 21. Suction Line Check Valve
5. Liquid Injection Check Valve 22. Suction Line Solenoid
6. Discharge Service Port 23. Hot Gas Solenoid
7. High Pressure Cutout Switch 24. Accumulator Tank
8. Condenser Inlet Solenoid 25. Suction Service Valve
9. Condenser Inlet Check Valve 26. Throttling Valve
10. Condenser Coil 27. Hot Gas Bypass Valve
11. High Pressure Relief Valve 28. Discharge Pressure Regulator Valve
12. Receiver Outlet Valve 29. Purge Valve
13. Receiver Sight Glass 30. Purge Check Valve
14. Dehydrator 31. Discharge Pressure Transducer
15. Heat Exchanger 32. Suction Pressure Transducer
16. Expansion Valve 33. Receiver Tank Pressure Check Valve
17. Distributor 34. Condenser Check Valve
Refrigeration System Diagram

17 January 2003 8-1


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

SPECTRUM Refrigeration SPECTRUM Unit Solenoids and


System Operation Valves
These components serve all zones. They are
General Description located in the condenser section of the unit and
are controlled by unit requirements.
TCI (Invertible) Systems
If a zone is capable of reverse cycle operation it is Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS)
said to be invertible. Reverse cycle means that the This valve controls the flow of refrigerant to the
evaporator coil in that zone is used as the condenser. This solenoid is energized (closed)
condenser coil during heat operation as long as at when any compartment is operating in heat or
least one other zone is operating in cool mode. All defrost mode. It will be de-energized if the
TCI systems are capable maintaining any discharge pressure becomes excessive to prevent
temperature in any zone and can also heat or cool unit shutdown. This valve is normally open. This
in any zone at any time. component is located between the discharge line
and the condenser.
Hot Gas Solenoids Open During Start
The unit is programmed to open the hot gas Purge Valve (PV)
solenoids for the first 30 seconds (approximately) This valve is energized (open) during heat or
after the unit starts. This sweeps the oil out of the defrost when discharge pressure is low to be sure
evaporators and returns the oil to the compressor. adequate refrigerant is available to heat or defrost
During this time the suction line solenoids will the zone. This valve is normally closed. This
also be open, and one or both of the liquid line component is located between the condenser
solenoids will be closed. At the end of the check valve and the condenser outlet line in the
30-second interval the solenoids will switch to condenser section of the unit.
their normal positions for cool, heat, or defrost as
determined by the controller setpoints and Liquid Injection Valve (LIV)
compartment temperatures.
This valve helps control the temperature of the
Condenser Evacuation Mode scroll compressor. It is energized or pulsed (open)
when the scroll compressor temperature exceeds a
The unit is programmed to keep the suction line set value to inject liquid refrigerant into the
solenoid open for the first 2 minutes compressor. The liquid refrigerant flashes to a gas
(approximately) after a zone shifts from cool to to effectively cool the compressor. This valve is
heat. This is called the condenser evacuation normally closed. This component is located
mode. Because the purge valve is open when any between the liquid line and the compressor in the
zone is in heat, the refrigerant moves out of the condenser section of the unit.
condenser and into the accumulator. This
improves unit performance. At the end of the Hot Gas Bypass Valve (HGB)
2-minute interval the suction line solenoid closes
(in the zone that is in heat) and the zone that is in This valve helps control suction pressure. If the
heat acts as the condenser for the zone that is in suction pressure falls below a set limit this valve
cool (see “One Zone Cooling One Zone Heating” is energized (open) to allow hot refrigerant gas to
on page 8-6). flow to the suction line until the suction pressure
rises to an acceptable level. This valve is normally
closed. This component is located in the hot gas
bypass line next to the compressor.

8-2 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Discharge Pressure Regulator (DPR) Transducers & Switches


This component is a mechanical control device
Discharge Pressure Transducer
used to increase the discharge pressure during
heat and defrost. The valve controls discharge This transducer supplies the discharge pressure at
pressure mechanically based on temperature and the compressor to the microprocessor.
the actual system pressure. This valve is normally
closed and opens when the set pressure is reached. Suction Pressure Transducer
This component is located in the hot gas line in
This transducer supplies the suction pressure to
the condenser section of the unit.
the microprocessor. It should be noted that the
suction pressure transducer is located on the
Zone Components throttle valve. As a result, the suction pressure
These components are required for each zone. displayed is compressor suction pressure, not
They are located in the remote evaporator of each system suction pressure.
zone and are controlled by zone requirements.
High Pressure Cutout Switch
Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS)
The high pressure cutout switch monitors the
This valve is energized (open) any time cooling, discharge pressure at the compressor. The switch
heating or defrosting is required in its zone. The is closed with normal pressures and open with
valve is de-energized when the zone is in null to excessive pressures. The switch will open and
stop refrigerant flow in that zone. This valve is close at pressures determined by the refrigerant
normally closed. used in the unit. The high pressure cutout is
located on the compressor discharge line.
Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS)
This valve is energized (open) any time heating or
defrosting is required in the zone. This valve is
normally closed.

Suction Line Solenoid (SLS)


The suction line solenoid is energized (closed)
when its compartment is operating in heat mode
(but not defrost) as long as at least one other zone
is operating in cool mode. This valve is normally
open. The suction line solenoid in an S-3
evaporator has a bleed orifice. This is used to
maintain refrigerant flow to the compressor when
the SLS is closed.

17 January 2003 8-3


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Operation

All Zones Cooling


When all zones are cooling the
unit condenser is used to
eliminate the heat from all
zones. This is a Conventional
Cooling Cycle.

1F
6 7
2F 10

4F 9
3F

5F
1R
2R

4R
3R
AJA1271
8

5R
Zone 1 Cool and Zone 2 Cool

8-4 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Zone 1 Cool and Zone 2 Cool Zone 2 Evaporator


High pressure refrigerant vapor leaves the 1R. Zone 2 Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS2)-Open
compressor and flows through the open CIS to the
2R. Zone 2 Liquid Return Check Valve
condenser where the refrigerant condenses into
(LRCV2)-Closed
high pressure liquid. The liquid refrigerant flows
through the receiver tank into the liquid lines. 3R. Zone 2 Suction Line Check Valve
(SLCV2)-Open
The LLS1 is open so some of the refrigerant flows
through the Zone 1 expansion valve into the Zone 4R. Zone 2 Suction Line Solenoid (SLS2)-Open
1 evaporator. There, liquid refrigerant cools the
5R. Zone 2 Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS2)-Closed
Zone 1 evaporator as it evaporates into low
pressure vapor. The refrigerant returns to the
Condensing Unit
compressor through the SLS1, the suction line,
SLCV1 and the accumulator. 6. Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS)-Open
The LLS2 is also open so some of the refrigerant 7. Condenser Inlet Check Valve (CICV)-Open
flows through the Zone 2 expansion valve into the
8. Condenser Check Valve (CCV)-Open
Zone 2 evaporator. There, liquid refrigerant cools
the Zone 2 evaporator as it evaporates into low 9. Purge Valve (PV)-Closed
pressure vapor. The refrigerant returns to the
10. Purge Check Valve (PCV)-Closed
compressor through the SLS2, the second suction
line, the SLCV2 and the accumulator.

Zone 1 Evaporator
1F. Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS1)-Open
2F. Zone 1 Liquid Return Check Valve
(LRCV1)-Closed
3F. Zone 1 Suction Line Check Valve
(SLCV1)-Open
4F. Zone 1 Suction Line Solenoid (SLS1)-Open
5F. Zone 1 Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS1)-Closed

17 January 2003 8-5


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

One Zone Cooling


One Zone Heating
When at least one zone is
cooling and another zone is
heating, the evaporator in the
heating zone may used as a
condenser to remove the heat
from the zone that is cooling.
The unit condenser is not used.
This is Reverse Cycle
operation.

1F
6 7
10
2F

4F 9
3F

5F
1R
2R

4R
3R
AJA1273
8

5R
Zone 1 Cool and Zone 2 Heat

8-6 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Zone 1 Cool and Zone 2 Heat Zone 2 Evaporator


The CIS is closed so high pressure refrigerant 1R. Zone 2 Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS2)-Open
vapor leaves the compressor and flows through
2R. Zone 2 Liquid Return Check Valve
the DPR to the Zone 2 hot gas line and the open
(LRCV2)-Open
HGS2 into the Zone 2 evaporator. There, the
refrigerant heats the Zone 2 evaporator and 3R. Zone 2 Suction Line Check Valve
condenses into high pressure liquid. Because the (SLCV2)-Closed
SLS2 is closed, the liquid refrigerant flows
4R. Zone 2 Suction Line Solenoid (SLS2)-Closed
through the LRCV2 and the liquid line to the
LLS1. 5R. Zone 2 Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS2)-Open
The LLS1 is open so the refrigerant flows through
Condensing Unit
the Zone 1 expansion valve into the Zone 1
evaporator. There, the liquid refrigerant cools the 6. Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS)-Closed/Open
Zone 1 evaporator as it evaporates into low (Pressure Dependent)
pressure vapor. The refrigerant returns to the
7. Condenser Inlet Check Valve
compressor through the SLS1, Suction Line,
(CICV)-Closed/Open
SLCV1 and the accumulator.
8. Condenser Check Valve (CCV)-Closed
In the condensing unit the DPR valve is used to
regulate head pressure. The purge valve is opened 9. Purge Valve (PV)-Open
continuously during heat to drain the condenser
10. Purge Check Valve (PCV)-Open
coil. The CIS valve is closed, but can be opened if
the discharge pressure is too high.

Zone 1 Evaporator
1F. Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS1)-Open
2F. Zone 1 Liquid Return Check Valve
(LRCV1)-Closed
3F. Zone 1 Suction Line Check Valve
(SLCV1)-Open
4F. Zone 1 Suction Line Solenoid (SLS1)-Open
5F. Zone 1 Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS1)-Closed

17 January 2003 8-7


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

All Zones Heating


When all zones are heating the
unit condenser is not used.
This is Hot Gas Heat
operation.

1F
6 7
2F 10

4F 9
3F

5F
1R
2R

4R
3R
AJA1272
8

5R
Zone 1 Heat and Zone 2 Heat

8-8 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Zone 1 Heat and Zone 2 Heat Zone 2 Evaporator


The CIS is closed so high pressure refrigerant 1R. Zone 2 Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS2)-Open
vapor leaves the compressor and flows through
2R. Zone 2 Liquid Return Check Valve
the DPR to Zone 1 and Zone 2 hot gas lines and
(LRCV2)-Closed
through HGS1 and HGS2 into both evaporators.
There, the refrigerant heats both evaporators and 3R. Zone 2 Suction Line Check Valve
condenses into high pressure liquid. The (SLCV2)-Open
refrigerant flows through the open suction line
4R. Zone 2 Suction Line Solenoid (SLS2)-Open
solenoids and back to the accumulator.
5R. Zone 2 Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS2)-Open
In the condensing unit the DPR valve is used to
regulate head pressure. The purge valve is opened
Condensing Unit
continuously during heat to drain the condenser
coil. The CIS valve is closed, and opens if the 6. Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS)-Closed/Open
discharge pressure is too high. (Pressure Dependent)
7. Condenser Inlet Check Valve
Zone 1 Evaporator
(CICV)-Closed/Open
1F. Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS1)-Open
8. Condenser Check Valve (CCV)-Closed
2F. Zone 1 Liquid Return Check Valve
9. Purge Valve (PV)-Open
(LRCV1)-Closed
10. Purge Check Valve (PCV)-Open
3F. Zone 1 Suction Line Check Valve
(SLCV1)-Open
4F. Zone 1 Suction Line Solenoid (SLS1)-Open
5F. Zone 1 Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS1)-Open

17 January 2003 8-9


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Any Zone Defrosting


When any zone enters defrost,
zones that are cooling or
heating are placed in Delayed
Cool/Heat mode. The unit
condenser is not used. Defrost
is accomplished by means of
Hot Gas Heat.

1F
6 7
2F 10

4F 9
3F

5F
1R
2R

4R
3R
AJA1276
8

5R
Zone 1 Delayed Cool and Zone 2 Defrost

8-10 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Zone 1 Delayed Cool and Zone 2 Defrost Zone 2 Evaporator


The CIS is closed so high pressure refrigerant 1R. Zone 2 Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS2)-Open
vapor leaves the compressor and flows through
2R. Zone 2 Liquid Return Check Valve
the DPR to the Zone 2 hot gas line and the open
(LRCV2)-Open
HGS2 into the Zone 2 evaporator. There, the
refrigerant heats the Zone 2 evaporator and 3R. Zone 2 Suction Line Check Valve
condenses into high pressure liquid. Because the (SLCV2)-Open
SLS2 is open, the liquid refrigerant returns to the
4R. Zone 2 Suction Line Solenoid (SLS2)-Open
compressor through the SLS2, the second suction
line, SLCV2 and the accumulator. The fans stay 5R. Zone 2 Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS2)-Open
off in the Zone 2 evaporator, allowing the coil to
defrost without warming the load. Condensing Unit
Due to the low pressure in the second suction line, 6. Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS)-Closed/Open
little or no refrigerant goes through the Zone 1 (Pressure Dependent)
evaporator.
7. Condenser Inlet Check Valve
In the condensing unit the DPR valve is used to (CICV)-Closed/Open
regulate head pressure. The purge valve is opened
8.Condenser Check Valve (CCV)-Closed
continuously during defrost to drain the condenser
coil. The CIS valve is closed, but can be opened if 9. Purge Valve (PV)-Open
the discharge pressure is too high.
10. Purge Check Valve (PCV)-Open
Zone 1 Evaporator
1F. Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS1)-Open
2F. Zone 1 Liquid Return Check Valve
(LRCV1)-Closed
3F. Zone 1 Suction Line Check Valve
(SLCV1)-Open
4F. Zone 1 Suction Line Solenoid (SLS1)-Open
5F. Zone 1 Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS1)-Closed

17 January 2003 8-11


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Operation of Multi-Temperature Unit Solenoids and Valves


Energized means that the microprocessor and interface board is supplying battery voltage to the device.

Item ID Type Cool Heat Defrost Reverse


Cycle

Condenser Inlet Solenoid CIS NO Energized Energized Energized


(Note 1) (closed) (closed) (closed)

Purge Valve PV NC Energized Energized Energized


(Note 1) (open) (open) (open)

Liquid Line Solenoid LLS NC Energized Energized Energized Energized


(open) (open) (open) (open)

Hot Gas Solenoid HGS NC Energized Energized Energized


(open) (open) (open)

Hot Gas Bypass Valve HGB NC Cycles


(Note 1)

Liquid Injection Valve LIV NC Cycles


(Note 2)

Discharge Pressure Regulator DPR NC Regulates Regulates Regulates


(Note 3)

Suction Line Solenoid SLS NO Energized


(closed)

Note 1 = Influenced by the pressure transducers

Note 2 = Influenced by the compressor temperature

Note 3 = Mechanical device

Summary
• When a zone is cooling the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is energized (open).
• When a zone is heating or defrosting the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is energized (open) and the Hot
Gas Solenoid (HGS) is energized (open).
• When a zone is in reverse cycle heat the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is energized (open), the Hot Gas
Solenoid (HGS) is energized (open) and the Suction Line Solenoid (SLS) is energized (closed).
When any zone is heating or defrosting the discharge pressure regulator is controlling discharge pressure.

8-12 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Transducer Pressure Control High Speed Solenoid (Any Zone Heating)


SPECTRUM Multi-Temperature microprocessors When any zone is in heat mode the
monitor the discharge and suction pressure of the microprocessor will enable the unit to run in high
compressor using the pressure transducers. This speed heat if required until the discharge pressure
information is used to control unit operation as exceeds 410 psig (2827 kPa). At that time the unit
shown below. will be forced to low speed heat to prevent a shut
down on high discharge pressure. When the
Purge Valve Solenoid discharge pressure drops below 390 psig
(2689 kPa) the controller will enable the unit to go
When any zone is in heat mode the Purge Valve is
back to high speed heat if required.
energized continuously.
The second chart shows the values for high
When any zone is in defrost mode the
ambient temperature conditions (ambient
microprocessor will energize the Purge Valve
temperature > 100°F (38°C).
until the discharge pressure exceeds 300 psig
(2068 kPa). At that time the unit will de-energize
the solenoid. This controls the amount of
refrigerant that is available during heat or defrost
operation. When the discharge pressure drops
below 225 psig (1551 kPa) the microprocessor
will again energize the Purge Valve to add
additional refrigerant to the system.

High Speed Solenoid - Any Zone Heating

Purge Valve Solenoid

High Speed Solenoid - Any Zone Heating –


High Ambient Temperatures

17 January 2003 8-13


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Invertible (Reverse Cycle Heat) Control Condenser Inlet Solenoid


When one zone requests heat and another zone is When any zone is in heat or defrost mode the
cooling the microprocessor will leave the heating microprocessor will energize the condenser inlet
zone in cool for one minute but will energize the solenoid until the discharge pressure exceeds
purge valve. For the next two minutes the unit will 400 psig (2758 kPa). At that time the condenser
energize the hot gas solenoid. The suction line inlet solenoid is de-energized to prevent a shut
solenoid is then energized for the zone in heat. At down on high discharge pressure. This is to
that time the unit will be operating in inverted or prevent shutdown for high discharge pressure
reverse cycle heat. This allows the system to during heat or defrost operation. When the
develop proper pressures to insure adequate discharge pressure drops below 250 psig
performance when the heating zone’s evaporator (1724 kPa) the controller will again energize the
coil is acting as the condenser coil for the zone(s) condenser inlet solenoid if required.
that is cooling.
If the discharge pressure drops below 100 psig
(689 kPa) the microprocessor will put the cooling
zone in null and the heating zone in hot gas heat.

Condenser Inlet Solenoid

Invertible (Reverse Cycle Heat) Control

8-14 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

(R01A) System Evacuation, Charging and Checking Charge


Where Used:
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To evacuate and charge a SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system.
NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

Evacuating the System


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

1. Be sure all refrigerant has


been recovered from the unit.
Connect vacuum pump and
dual gauge manifold for 3 point
evacuation from suction
service valve, discharge
service port and receiver tank
outlet valve.

2. Verify proper operation of the


Evacuation Station as shown
in the Evacuation Station
Operation Manual (TK 40612).

3. Connect the Evacuation


Station for 3 point evacuation
from the suction service valve,
discharge service port and
receiver tank outlet valve.

17 January 2003 8-15


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Evacuating the System (continued)


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

4. Connect a battery charger to The battery charger must be Evacuation Mode is used to
unit battery. capable of at least 15 amperes open the unit valves for
output. This will maintain the evacuation. Failure to connect
charge level of the battery a battery charger may result in
during the time required to the battery voltage falling too
evacuate and charge the unit. low to reliably operate the
microprocessor and valves.

5. Turn the unit on.

6. Enter Evacuation Mode as


shown in Section 4 of this
manual.

7. Start the evacuation pump and


mid-seat the suction service
valve and receiver tank outlet
valves.

8. Install service valve stem caps


with seals and tighten. Valve
stems should remain capped
while evacuating unit.

9. Evacuate the unit to 500


microns.

10. Continue to evacuate for one


additional hour after reaching
500 microns. This insures
complete evacuation of the
remote evaporators and lines.

8-16 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Evacuating the System (continued)


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

11. Close the Evacuation Station


valve nearest the vacuum
pump to isolate the pump from
the system. Turn the pump off.

12. Observe vacuum gauge. The system pressure should If the pressure does not hold
remain below 2000 microns for check for leaks (if a leak is
5 minutes. suspected) or continue
evacuation (if system is not
dry).

13. Restart the pump, open the


Evacuation Station valve
nearest the pump and repeat
Steps 9, 11 and 12 as required
until system pressure remains
below 2000 microns for 5
minutes.

14. When system pressure Do not exercise the service


remains below 2000 microns valves with the unit in a deep
for 5 minutes, restart the vacuum unless the evacuation
pump, open the Evacuation pump is operating.
Station valve nearest the pump
and back seat the suction
service valve while the
evacuation pump is still
operating. Replace the valve
cap, re-close the Evacuation
Station valve “D” (nearest the
pump) and stop the evacuation
pump.

15. Proceed with Charging the


System as shown on the next
page.

17 January 2003 8-17


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Charging the System


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

1. Ensure that all compartment Ceiling mounted bulkheads


bulkheads are open. should not be stored close to
the evaporator outlets as this
will restrict airflow.

2. Determine the correct charge This information is shown in


for the unit as configured. the Maintenance Manual for
the unit. Actual weight of
charge may vary somewhat
due to length of refrigerant
lines.

3. Connect refrigerant supply as


shown in the Evacuation
Station Operation Manual (TK
40612).

4. The unit should still be in


Evacuation Mode. Add as
much of the charge as possible
as liquid through the discharge
service port and receiver outlet
valve.

5. Back seat the receiver outlet


service valve.

6. Exit Evacuation Mode.

8-18 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Charging the System (continued)


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

7. Remove the evacuation station


from the unit.

8. Install a gauge set and


reconnect refrigerant supply.

9. Turn all zones on and set all


zone setpoints for the lowest
possible temperature to insure
that all zones run in Cool
Mode. Allow the unit to start.

10. Cover the condenser as


required to maintain discharge
pressure from 325 psig to
400 psig (2241 kPa to
2758 kPa) and add the
remaining charge by weight as
liquid through the Suction
Service Valve.

11. If necessary, continue to add


refrigerant until the ball in the
receiver tank sight glass is
floating but is no higher than
1/2 way up the glass. If the
system is overcharged,
remove refrigerant until the ball
in the receiver tank sight glass
is floating but is no higher than
1/2 way up the glass.

17 January 2003 8-19


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Charging the System (continued)


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

12. Continue to operate the unit


and monitor the sight glass
until all compartment
temperatures are at or below
0°F (-18°C).

13. If the receiver tank sight glass


level drops add additional
refrigerant as required to
maintain refrigerant in the
bottom 1/2 of the sight glass.

14. When refrigerant level is


correct back seat all service
valves, remove gauges and
securely replace valve stem
covers with seals and service
port caps before returning unit
to service.

Checking the Refrigerant Charge


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

1. Ensure that all compartment Ceiling mounted bulkheads


bulkheads are open. should not be stored close to
the evaporator outlets as this
will restrict airflow.

2. Turn all zones on and set all


zone setpoints for the lowest
possible temperature to insure
that all zones run in Cool
Mode. Allow the unit to start.

8-20 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Checking the Refrigerant Charge (continued)


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

3. Cover the condenser as


required to maintain discharge
pressure from 325 psig to
400 psig (2241 kPa to
2758 kPa).

4. If necessary, add refrigerant


until the ball in the receiver
tank sight glass is floating but
is no higher than 1/2 way up
the glass. If the system is
overcharged, remove
refrigerant until the ball in the
receiver tank sight glass is
floating but is no higher than
1/2 way up the glass.

5. Continue to operate the unit


and monitor the sight glass
until all compartment
temperatures are at or below
0°F (-18°C).

6. If the receiver tank sight glass


level drops add additional
refrigerant as required to
maintain refrigerant in the
bottom 1/2 of the sight glass.

17 January 2003 8-21


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Checking the Refrigerant Charge (continued)


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

7. When refrigerant level is


correct back seat all service
valves, remove gauges and
securely replace valve stem
covers with seals and service
port caps before returning unit
to service.

8-22 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

(R02A) Low Side Pumpdown Test


Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To perform a low side pumpdown on a SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system to test internal
seals.
NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

Low Side Pumpdown Test


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

1. Attach gauge set.

2. Disconnect the Hot Gas


Bypass Valve connector at the
solenoid.

3. Set all zone setpoints for the


lowest possible temperature to
insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

4. Start and run all zones in Cool Failure to operate unit to


Mode for 10 minutes. normal temperature and
Discharge pressure should be pressure may yield unreliable
greater than 325 psig results.
(2241 kPa) with R-404A.

5. Front seat the receiver tank CAUTION: Do not allow the


outlet valve and perform a low compressor to run in a
vacuum for more than
side pumpdown to 5 to 10 inch 1 minute.
vacuum (-17 kPa to -34 kPa).

17 January 2003 8-23


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Low Side Pumpdown Test (continued)


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

6. Shut the unit down and If low side pressure does not
observe gauges. The low side hold check: Receiver Tank
should not rise above 0 psig Outlet Valve, Hot Gas
(0 kPa) in less than 2 minutes. Solenoids in all zones, Hot
Gas Bypass Valve or Purge
Valve.

7. If low side pressure holds


proceed with desired test.

8. When test is complete


reconnect the Hot Gas Bypass
Valve connector at the
solenoid.

8-24 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

(R03A) Hot Gas Solenoid Test


Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To test the Hot Gas Solenoid on a SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system.
NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

Hot Gas Solenoid Test


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

1. Attach gauge set.

2. Disconnect the Hot Gas


Bypass Valve connector at the
solenoid.

3. Set all zone setpoints for the


lowest possible temperature to
insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

4. Start and run all zones in Cool


Mode for 10 minutes.
Discharge pressure should be
greater than 325 psig
(2241 kPa) with R-404A.

5. Front seat the receiver tank CAUTION: Do not allow the


outlet valve and perform a low compressor to run in a
vacuum for more than
side pumpdown to 5 to 10 inch 1 minute.
vacuum (-17 kPa to -34 kPa).

6. Shut the unit down and If low side pressure does not
observe gauges. The low side hold check: Receiver Tank
should not rise above 0 psig Outlet Valve, Hot Gas
(0 kPa) in less than 2 minutes. Solenoids in all zones, Hot
If low side pressure holds Gas Bypass Valve or Purge
proceed with test. Valve.

17 January 2003 8-25


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Hot Gas Solenoid Test (continued)


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

7. Enter Interface Board Test See Section 4 for more


Mode as shown in Section 4. information on using Interface
Board Test Mode.

8. From Interface Board Test See Section 4 for more


select the Zone 1 Hot Gas information on using Interface
Solenoid. Board Test Mode.

9. Momentarily energize the The low side gauge should rise See Section 4 for more
valve (for less than 1 second). slightly. If low side pressure information on using Interface
does not rise check the Hot Board Test Mode.
Gas Solenoid for Zone 1. If the
low side pressure rises
proceed with test.

10. From Interface Board Test See Section 4 for more


select the Zone 2 Hot Gas information on using Interface
Solenoid. Board Test Mode.

11. Momentarily energize the The low side gauge should rise See Section 4 for more
valve (for less than 1 second). slightly. If low side pressure information on using Interface
does not rise check the Hot Board Test Mode.
Gas Solenoid for Zone 2. If the
low side pressure rises
proceed with test.

12. Exit the Interface Board Test. See Section 4 for more
information on using Interface
Board Test Mode.

13. If no further testing is required


remove gauges, backseat all
service valves and securely
replace valve stem covers with
seals and service port caps
before returning unit to service.

14. When test is complete


reconnect the Hot Gas Bypass
Valve connector at the
solenoid.

8-26 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

(R04A) Liquid Line Solenoid & Liquid Return Check Valve Test
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To test the Liquid Line Solenoid on a SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system.
NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

Liquid Line Solenoid & Liquid Return Check Valve Test


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

1. Attach gauge set.

2. Disconnect the Hot Gas


Bypass Valve connector at the
solenoid.

3. Set all zone setpoints for the


lowest possible temperature to
insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

4. Start and run all zones in Cool


Mode for 10 minutes.
Discharge pressure should be
greater than 325 psig
(2241 kPa) with R-404A.

5. Front seat the receiver tank CAUTION: Do not allow the


outlet valve and perform a low compressor to run in a
vacuum for more than
side pumpdown to 5 to 10 inch 1 minute.
vacuum (-17 kPa to -34 kPa).

17 January 2003 8-27


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Liquid Line Solenoid & Liquid Return Check Valve Test (continued)
STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

6. Shut the unit down and If low side pressure does not
observe gauges. The low side hold check: Receiver Tank
should not rise above 0 psig Outlet Valve, Hot Gas
(0 kPa) in less than 2 minutes. Solenoids in all zones, Hot
If the low side pressure holds Gas Bypass Valve or Purge
proceed with desired test. Valve.

7. Open receiver tank outlet valve The low side should not rise. If Leaking Liquid Return Check
and observe gauges. If the low low side pressure does not Valves will cause cooling
side pressure holds proceed hold check: Liquid Line problems. Leaking Liquid Line
with test. Solenoids & Liquid Return Solenoids may allow cooling
Check Valves in all zones. during null operation.

8. Enter Interface Board Test See Section 4 for more


Mode as shown in Section 4. information on using Interface
Board Test Mode.

9. From Interface Board Test See Section 4 for more


select the Zone 1 Liquid Line information on using Interface
Solenoid. Board Test Mode.

10. Momentarily energize the The low side gauge should rise See Section 4 for more
valve (for less than 1 second). slightly. If low side pressure information on using Interface
does not rise check the Liquid Board Test Mode.
Line Solenoid for Zone 1. If the
low side pressure rises
proceed with test.

11. From Interface Board Test See Section 4 for more


select the Zone 2 Liquid Line information on using Interface
Solenoid. Board Test Mode.

8-28 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Liquid Line Solenoid & Liquid Return Check Valve Test (continued)
STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

12. Momentarily energize the The low side gauge should rise See Section 4 for more
valve (for less than 1 second). slightly. If low side pressure information on using Interface
does not rise check the Liquid Board Test Mode.
Line Solenoid for Zone 2. If the
low side pressure rises
proceed with test.

13. Exit the Interface Board Test. See Section 4 for more
information on using Interface
Board Test Mode.

14. If no further testing is required


remove gauges, backseat all
service valves and securely
replace valve stem covers with
seals and service port caps
before returning unit to service.

15. When test is complete


reconnect the Hot Gas Bypass
Valve connector at the
solenoid.

17 January 2003 8-29


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

8-30 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

(R06A) Suction Line Check Valve Test


Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To test the Suction Line Check Valves on a SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system.
NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

Suction Line Check Valve Test


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

1. Attach gauge set.

2. Disconnect the Hot Gas


Bypass Valve connector at the
solenoid.

3. Set all zone setpoints for the


lowest possible temperature to
insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

4. Start and run all zones in


Cool Mode for 10 minutes or
until stable - discharge
pressure should be greater
than 325 psig (224 kPa) with
R-404A.

5. Front seat the receiver tank CAUTION: Do not allow the


outlet valve and perform a low compressor to run in a
vacuum for more than
side pumpdown to 5 to 10 inch 1 minute.
vacuum (-17 kPa to -34 kPa).

17 January 2003 8-31


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Suction Line Check Valve Test (continued)


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

6. Shut the unit down and If low side pressure does not
observe gauges. The low side hold check: Receiver Tank
should not rise above 0 psig Outlet Valve, Hot Gas
(0 kPa) in less than 2 minutes. Solenoids in all zones, Hot
If the low side pressure holds Gas Bypass Valve or Purge
proceed with desired test. Valve.

7. Bleed through the gauge


manifold to the low side and
establish a pressure of 5 to 20
psig (34 kPa to 138 kPa).
Close the hand valves on the
gauge set.

8. Observe the low pressure If the pressure drops within 2


gauge. minutes check the Suction
Line Check Valves for leaks
under low pressure.

9. If the low side pressure holds


for 2 minutes proceed with
test.

10. Equalize the system through


the gauge manifold to the low
side. Close the hand valves on
the gauge set.

11. Observe the low pressure If pressure drops within 2


gauge. minutes check the Suction
Line Check Valves for leaks
under high pressure.

8-32 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Suction Line Check Valve Test (continued)


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

12. If no further testing is required


remove gauges, backseat all
service valves and securely
replace valve stem covers with
seals and service port caps
before returning unit to service.

13. When test is complete


reconnect the Hot Gas Bypass
Valve connector at the
solenoid.

17 January 2003 8-33


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

8-34 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

(R07A) Purge Valve Test


Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To test the Purge Valve on a SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system.
NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

Purge Valve Test


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

1. Attach gauge set.

2. Disconnect the Hot Gas


Bypass Valve connector at the
solenoid.

3. Set all zone setpoints for the


lowest possible temperature to
insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

4. Start and run all zones in Cool


Mode for 10 minutes or until
stable - discharge pressure
should be greater than 325
psig (2241 kPa) with R-404A.

5. Front seat the receiver tank CAUTION: Do not allow the


outlet valve and perform a low compressor to run in a
vacuum for more than
side pumpdown to 5 to 10 inch 1 minute.
vacuum (-17 kPa to -34 kPa).

17 January 2003 8-35


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Purge Valve Test (continued)


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

6. Shut the unit down and If low side pressure does not
observe gauges. The low side hold check: Receiver Tank
should not rise above 0 psig Outlet Valve, Hot Gas
(0 kPa) in less than 2 minutes. Solenoids in all zones, Hot
If low side pressure holds Gas Bypass Valve or Purge
proceed with desired test. Valve.

7. Enter Interface Board Test See Section 4 for more


Mode as shown in Section 4. information on using Interface
Board Test Mode.

8. From Interface Board Test See Section 4 for more


select the Purge Valve. information on using Interface
Board Test Mode.

9. Momentarily energize the The low side gauge should rise See Section 4 for more
valve (for less than 1 second). slightly. If the low side pressure information on using Interface
does not rise check the Purge Board Test Mode.
Valve.

10. Exit the Interface Board Test. See Section 4 for more
information on using Interface
Board Test Mode.

11. If no further testing is required


remove gauges, backseat all
service valves and securely
replace valve stem covers with
seals and service port caps
before returning unit to service.

12. When test is complete


reconnect the Hot Gas Bypass
Valve connector at the
solenoid.

8-36 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

(R08A) Condenser Inlet Solenoid, Receiver Tank Check Valve


& Purge Check Valve Test
Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To test the Condenser Inlet Solenoid, Receiver Tank Check Valve and Purge Check Valve on a
SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system.
IMPORTANT: This test will require the removal of some refrigerant using a recovery machine
NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

Condenser Inlet Solenoid, Receiver Tank Check Valve


& Purge Check Valve Test
STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

1. Verify that the Hot Gas


Solenoids in all zones and the
Hot Gas Bypass Valve are in
good working condition.

2. Attach gauge set.

3. Disconnect the Hot Gas


Bypass Valve connector at the
solenoid.

4. Attach a recovery machine to


the receiver outlet service
valve port using a manifold
gauge set to allow monitoring
receiver tank pressure.

17 January 2003 8-37


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Condenser Inlet Solenoid, Receiver Tank Check Valve


& Purge Check Valve Test (continued)
STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

5. Set all zone setpoints for the


lowest possible temperature to
insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

6. Start and run all zones in Cool


Mode for 10 minutes or until
stable - discharge pressure
should be greater than 325
psig (2241 kPa) with R-404A.

7. Front seat the receiver tank CAUTION: Do not allow the


outlet valve and perform a low compressor to run in a
vacuum for more than
side pumpdown to 5 to 10 inch 1 minute.
vacuum (-17 kPa to -34 kPa).

8. Shut the unit down and If low side pressure does not
observe gauges. The low side hold check: Receiver Tank
should not rise above 0 psig Outlet Valve, Hot Gas
(0 kPa) in less than 2 minutes. Solenoids in all zones, Hot
If low side pressure holds Gas Bypass Valve or Purge
proceed with desired test. Valve.

Condenser Inlet Solenoid


and Receiver Tank Check
Valve Test

9. Enter Interface Board Test See Section 4 for more


Mode as shown in Section 4. information on using Interface
Board Test Mode.

8-38 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Condenser Inlet Solenoid, Receiver Tank Check Valve


& Purge Check Valve Test (continued)
STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

10. From Interface Board Test See Section 4 for more


select the Condenser Inlet information on using Interface
Solenoid. Board Test Mode.

11. Lock the valve on. The Condenser Inlet Solenoid See Section 4 for more
will remain energized for a information on using Interface
maximum 15 minute timeout - Board Test Mode.
if the test time is expected to
exceed 15 minutes this step
must be repeated about every
ten minutes to prevent timeout.

12. Start the recovery machine to If high side pressure does not
remove refrigerant from the hold check the Condenser Inlet
condenser and receiver tank Solenoid and Receiver Tank
and observe the high side Check Valve.
gauge. Remove refrigerant
until there is a 50 to 100 psig
(345 to 689 kPa) difference
between receiver tank
pressure and the high side
pressure. The high side
pressure should not change.

13. If the high side pressure holds


proceed with the test.

Purge Check Valve Test

14. From Interface Board Test See Section 4 for more


select the Condenser Inlet information on using Interface
Solenoid. Board Test Mode.

17 January 2003 8-39


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Condenser Inlet Solenoid, Receiver Tank Check Valve


& Purge Check Valve Test (continued)
STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

15. Lock the valve on. The Condenser Inlet Solenoid See Section 4 for more
will remain energized for a information on using Interface
maximum 15 minute timeout - Board Test Mode.
if the test time is expected to
exceed 15 minutes this step
must be repeated about every
ten minutes to prevent timeout.

16. Pressurize the low side of the If the receiver tank pressure
system using the refrigerant changes check the Purge
recovered earlier and observe Check Valve.
the Receiver Tank Pressure
Gauge. The pressure should
not change.

17. Exit the Interface Board Test. See Section 4 for more
information on using Interface
Board Test Mode.

18. If no further testing is required


remove gauges, backseat all
service valves and securely
replace valve stem covers with
seals and service port caps
before returning unit to service.

19. When test is complete


reconnect the Hot Gas Bypass
Valve connector at the
solenoid.

8-40 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

(R09A) Service Pumpdown


Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To perform a service pumpdown on a SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system to allow service of
all low side components, compressor, suction transducer, drier, liquid line solenoids, suction line
solenoids, suction line check valve and expansion valve.
NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

Low Side Pumpdown


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

1. Attach gauge set.

2. Disconnect the Hot Gas


Bypass Valve connector at the
solenoid.

3. Set all zone setpoints for the


lowest possible temperature to
insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

4. Start and run all zones in Cool


Mode for 10 minutes or until
stable.

5. Front seat the receiver tank CAUTION: Do not allow the


outlet valve and perform a low compressor to run in a
vacuum for more than
side pumpdown to 0 to 5 inch 1 minute.
vacuum (0 to -17 kPa).

17 January 2003 8-41


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Low Side Pumpdown (continued)


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

6. Shut the unit down and If low side pressure does not If the low side pressure can not
observe gauges. The low side hold check: Receiver Tank be maintained below 15 psig,
should not rise above 5 psig Outlet Valve, Hot Gas (103 kPa) the refrigerant must
(34 kPa) in less than 2 Solenoids in all zones, Hot be recovered as shown in
minutes. Gas Bypass Valve or Purge Refrigeration Service
Valve. Procedure R10A before
opening the system.

7. Before opening the low side for


service, use the gauge
manifold to equalize the
pressure in the low side to
slightly positive.

8. If all zones are slightly greater


than 0 psig (0 kPa), work can
proceed on low side
components.

9. When service is complete


perform a low side evacuation
per Refrigeration Service
Procedure R11A, backseat all
service valves, remove gauges
and securely replace valve
stem covers with seals and
service port caps before
returning unit to service.

10. When test is complete


reconnect the Hot Gas Bypass
Valve connector at the
solenoid.

8-42 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

(R10A) SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Refrigerant Recovery


Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To recover the refrigerant charge from a SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system.
NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before performing another Refrigeration Service Procedure.

Recovering Refrigerant from Unit with Operating Compressor


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

1. Connect recovery machine for


recovery from discharge
service port and receiver tank
outlet valve.

2. If the compressor is operable,


perform a low side pumpdown
per Refrigeration Service
Procedure R02A.

3. Recover the liquid refrigerant


from the receiver tank.

4. Continue to recover the


refrigerant as a vapor from
both points.

17 January 2003 8-43


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Recovering Refrigerant from Unit with Failed Compressor


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

1. Connect recovery machine for


recovery from discharge
service port and receiver tank
outlet valve.

2. Midseat the receiver tank


outlet valve.

3. Connect the unit battery and This will maintain the charge Evacuation Mode is used to
install battery charger on level of the battery during the open valves as required for
battery. The battery charger time required to evacuate and evacuation. Failure to connect
must be capable of at least 15 charge the unit. a battery charger may result in
amperes output. the battery voltage falling too
low to reliably operate the
valves.

4. Enter Evacuation Mode as All normally closed valves will See Section 4 for more
shown in Section 4. be energized. information on using Interface
Board Test Mode.

5. Recover the refrigerant as a


liquid/vapor from both points.

8-44 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

(R12A) Hot Gas Bypass Valve Test


Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To test the Hot Gas Bypass Valve on a SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system.
NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

Hot Gas Bypass Valve Test


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

1. Attach gauge set.

2. Disconnect the Hot Gas


Bypass Valve connector at the
solenoid.

3. Set all zone setpoints for the


lowest possible temperature to
insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

4. Start and run all zones in Cool


Mode for 10 minutes or until
stable - discharge pressure
should be greater than 325
psig (2241 kPa) with R-404A.

5. Front seat the receiver tank CAUTION: Do not allow the


outlet valve and perform a low compressor to run in a
vacuum for more than
side pumpdown to 5 to 10 inch 1 minute.
vacuum (-17 kPa to -34 kPa).

17 January 2003 8-45


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Hot Gas Bypass Valve Test (continued)


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

6. Shut the unit down and If low side pressure does not
observe gauges. The low side hold check: Receiver Tank
should not rise above 0 psig Outlet Valve, Hot Gas
(0 kPa) in less than 2 minutes. Solenoids in all zones, Hot
If low side pressure holds Gas Bypass Valve or Purge
proceed with the next step. Valve.

7. Reconnect the Hot Gas


Bypass Valve connector at the
solenoid.

8. Enter Interface Board Test See Section 4 for more


Mode as shown in Section 4. information on using Interface
Board Test Mode.

9. From Interface Board Test See Section 4 for more


select the Hot Gas Bypass information on using Interface
Valve. Board Test Mode.

10. Momentarily energize the The low side gauge should rise See Section 4 for more
valve (for less than 1 second). slightly. If the low side pressure information on using Interface
does not rise check the Hot Board Test Mode.
Gas Bypass Valve.

11. Exit the Interface Board Test. See Section 4 for more
information on using Interface
Board Test Mode.

12. If no further testing is required


remove gauges, backseat all
service valves and securely
replace valve stem covers with
seals and service port caps
before returning unit to service.

8-46 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

(R13A) Liquid Injection Valve Test


Where Used
All SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units

Purpose
To test the Liquid Injection Valve on a SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system.
NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

Liquid Injection Valve Test


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

1. Attach gauge set.

2. Disconnect the Hot Gas


Bypass Valve connector at the
solenoid.

3. Set all zone setpoints for the


lowest possible temperature to
insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

4. Start and run all zones in Cool


Mode for 10 minutes or until
stable - discharge pressure
should be greater than 325
psig (2241 kPa) with R-404A.

5. Front seat the compressor CAUTION: Do not allow the


suction service valve and compressor to run in a
vacuum for more than
perform a compressor 1 minute.
pumpdown to 5 to 10 inch
vacuum (-17 to -34 kPa).

17 January 2003 8-47


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Liquid Injection Valve Test (continued)


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

6. Shut the unit down and If low side pressure does not
observe gauges. The low side hold check: Receiver Tank
should not rise above 0 psig Outlet Valve, Hot Gas
(0 kPa) in less than 2 minutes. Solenoids in all zones, Hot
If low side pressure holds Gas Bypass Valve or Purge
proceed with desired test. Valve.

7. Enter Interface Board Test See Section 4 for more


Mode as shown in Section 4. information on using Interface
Board Test Mode.

8. From Interface Board Test See Section 4 for more


select the Liquid Injection information on using Interface
Valve. Board Test Mode.

9. Momentarily energize the The low side gauge should rise See Section 4 for more
valve (for less than 1 second). slightly. If the low side pressure information on using Interface
does not rise check the Liquid Board Test Mode.
Injection Valve.

10. Exit the Interface Board Test. See Section 4 for more
information on using Interface
Board Test Mode.

11. If no further testing is required


remove gauges, backseat all
service valves and securely
replace valve stem covers with
seals and service port caps
before returning unit to service.

8-48 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Liquid Injection Valve Test (continued)


STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

12. When test is complete


reconnect the Hot Gas Bypass
Valve connector at the
solenoid.

17 January 2003 8-49


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Diagnostic Data Collection Procedure


The information shown on the Data Collection Form at the back of this procedure is helpful when
diagnosing Thermo King multi-temp units that suffer from reduced cooling or heating capacity. This data
presents a comprehensive picture of unit operating conditions and allows the technician or service
representative to accurately assess the situation. The Data Collection Form should be completed before
contacting Thermo King Service.

Diagnostic Recommendations
The following recommendations will aid in performing an accurate diagnosis in a timely manner. They
also insure that accurate data is recorded on the Data Collection Form.
• Always record all alarm codes that exist. Often they provide a direct path to the source of a problem.
Consult Section 5 for a complete list of alarms and the recommended corrective actions for each
alarm.
• Always perform a Pretrip Test. In almost every instance, if a problem exists an alarm code (or codes)
will be generated by the Pretrip Test that point to the source of the problem.
• If suspect, confirm the accuracy of the suction and discharge pressure transducers by installing a
calibrated refrigeration gauge set. It should be noted that the suction pressure transducer is located on
the throttle valve. As a result, the suction pressure displayed is compressor suction pressure, not
system suction pressure.
• If suspect, confirm the accuracy of unit temperature sensors with a calibrated thermometer. Be sure all
sensor grades are properly set.
• Be sure no airflow restrictions are present. Check the evaporator and condenser coils for cleanliness.
• Be sure the engine rpm is set to specification and the drive belt is properly adjusted.
• If indicated, check refrigerant charge, compressor oil level, throttle valve setting and system
efficiency.
• Be sure the box door seals and insulation are in good condition and compartment bulkheads are
properly installed and leak free.

8-50 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Completing the Data Collection Form


Verify accuracy of unit pressure transducers and temperatures sensors as required before collecting data.
Use Service Test Mode in the Maintenance Menu to place the unit in the required modes of operation as
shown on the Data Collection Form. Service Test Mode displays the return air and discharge air
temperature sensors and calculates temperature differential. Consult Section 4 for additional information
on using Service Test Mode.
Record the values requested on the Data Collection Form at the beginning of each test and again 10
minutes later after unit operation in the specified modes has stabilized. Then proceed with the next test
shown on the Data Collection Form.
Cover the condenser as required to maintain discharge pressure at the level experienced with a 100°F
(38°C) ambient temperature. With R-404A refrigerant discharge pressure should be from 350 to 375 psig
(2413 kPa to 2586 kPa).
It will be helpful to note any extraordinary conditions such as very high or very low ambient temperature.

17 January 2003 8-51


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Unit Data Collection Form


Always complete the first three sections of this form.

Zone 1 High Speed Cool Zone 2 High Speed Cool

Time Return Discharge Temp Return Discharge Temp Suction Discharge


Air Temp Air Temp Differential Air Temp Air Temp Differential Pressure Pressure

Zone 1 High Speed Cool Zone 2 High Speed Heat

Time Return Discharge Temp Return Discharge Temp Suction Discharge


Air Temp Air Temp Differential Air Temp Air Temp Differential Pressure Pressure

Zone 1 High Speed Heat Zone 2 High Speed Cool

Time Return Discharge Temp Return Discharge Temp Suction Discharge


Air Temp Air Temp Differential Air Temp Air Temp Differential Pressure Pressure

8-52 17 January 2003


Section 8 — SPECTRUM Refrigeration Procedures

Complete these four sections if the unit is experiencing reduced


cooling or heating capacity.

Zone 1 High Speed Cool Zone 2 Null

Time Return Discharge Temp Return Discharge Temp Suction Discharge


Air Temp Air Temp Differential Air Temp Air Temp Differential Pressure Pressure

Zone 1 Null Zone 2 High Speed Cool

Time Return Discharge Temp Return Discharge Temp Suction Discharge


Air Temp Air Temp Differential Air Temp Air Temp Differential Pressure Pressure

Zone 1 High Speed Heat Zone 2 Null

Time Return Discharge Temp Return Discharge Temp Suction Discharge


Air Temp Air Temp Differential Air Temp Air Temp Differential Pressure Pressure

Zone 1 Null Zone 2 High Speed Cool

Time Return Discharge Temp Return Discharge Temp Suction Discharge


Air Temp Air Temp Differential Air Temp Air Temp Differential Pressure Pressure

17 January 2003 8-53


Section 9 – SPECTRUM Drawings

Changes and Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1


TS 500 SPECTRUM Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
5D55037 Rev. C
TS 500 SPECTRUM Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
5D55036 Rev. C
Section 9 – SPECTRUM Drawings
CHANGES AND COMMENTS
You are invited to comment on this manual so it can be updated and improved to better meet
your needs. Any corrections or comments are welcome. Please complete the following informa-
tion:

Manual Form Number _______________________________________________________

Section and Page # _________________________________________________________

Your Name ________________________________________________________________

Company Name ____________________________________________________________

Phone Number _____________________________________________________________

Corrections and comments ___________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Return to: THERMO KING CORPORATION


314 West 90th Street
Minneapolis, MN 55420
Attn: Paul Barbaro

17 January 2003 9-1


Section 9 – SPECTRUM Drawings

9-2 17 January 2003


TS 500 SPECTRUM Schematic Diagram — Page 1 of 3

9-3
TS 500 SPECTRUM Schematic Diagram — Page 2 of 3

9-4
TS 500 SPECTRUM Schematic Diagram — Page 3 of 3

9-5
TS 500 SPECTRUM Wiring Diagram — Page 1 of 3

9-6
TS 500 SPECTRUM Wiring Diagram — Page 2 of 3

9-7
TS 500 SPECTRUM Wiring Diagram — Page 3 of 3

9-8

You might also like